BS 400

BS-400/BS-420
Chemistry Analyzer
Service Manual
2011-2012 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights
Reserved.
For this Service Manual, the issued Date is 2012-06.
Intellectual Property Statement

SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter
called Mindray) owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and
this manual. This manual may refer to information protected by copyrights or
patents and does not convey any license under the patent rights of Mindray, nor
the rights of others. Mindray does not assume any liability arising out of any
infringements of patents or other rights of third parties.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential

information. Disclosure of the information in this manual in any manner
whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rent, adaption and translation of

this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray
is strictly forbidden.
, , , , , are the
registered trademarks or trademarks owned by Mindray in China and other
countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for
editorial purposes without the intention of improperly using them. They are the
property of their respective owners.
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall

not be liable for errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential
damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for safety, reliability and performance of this product only
in the condition that:
all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of

this product are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable
national and local requirements;
the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
Upon request, Mindray may provide, with compensation, necessary circuit

diagrams, calibration illustration list and other information to help qualified
technician to maintain and repair some parts, which Mindray may define as user
serviceable.
i
WARNING:
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this

equipment to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan.
Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or injury of human
health.
NOTE:
This equipment is to be operated only by medical professionals
trained and authorized by Mindray or Mindray-authorized
distributors.
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any
transportation or other charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential
damages or delay resulting from the improper use or application of the product or
the use of parts or accessories not approved by Mindray or repairs by people
other than Mindray authorized personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:
any Mindray product which has been subjected to misuse, negligence or

accident;
any Mindray product from which Mindray's original serial number tag or
product identification markings have been altered or removed;
any product of any other manufacturer.
Return Policy
Return Procedure
In the event that it becomes necessary to return this product or part of this
product to Mindray, the following procedure should be followed:
Obtain return authorization: Contact the Mindray Service Department and

obtain a Customer Service Authorization (Mindray) number. The Mindray
number must appear on the outside of the shipping container. Returned
shipments will not be accepted if the Mindray number is not clearly visible.
Please provide the model number, serial number, and a brief description of
the reason for return.
ii
Freight policy: The customer is responsible for freight charges when this
product is shipped to Mindray for service (this includes customs charges).
Return address: Please send the part(s) or equipment to the address offered
by Customer Service department.
Company Contact
Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Address: Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, Hi-tech Industrial
Park, Nanshan, ShenZhen 518057, P.R.China,
Tel: +86 755 26582479 26582888
Fax: +86 755 26582934 26582500
iii
iv
Foreword
Who Should Read This Manual

This manual is geared for service personnel authorized by Mindray.
What Can You Find in This Manual

This manual covers principles, installation procedures, theories, maintenance and
troubleshooting guidelines of the system. Please service the system strictly as instructed by this
manual.
Conventions Used in This Manual

This manual uses the following typographical conventions to clarify meanings in the text.
Bold and Italic font indicates text displayed on the screen, such as Sample Request.
Safety Symbols
In this manual, the signal words BIOHAZARD, WARNING, CAUTION and

NOTE are used regarding safety and other important instructions. The signal words and their
meanings are defined as follows. Please understand their meanings clearly before reading this
manual.
When you see Then

Read the statement following the symbol. The
WARNING statement is alerting you to an operating hazard
that can cause personal injury.

BIOHAZARD statement is alerting you to a potentially
biohazardous condition.

CAUTION statement is alerting you to a possibility of system
damage or unreliable results.

NOTE statement is alerting you to information that
requires your attention.
Foreword 1
Labels Used On the System
The labels attached to the panels of the system use symbols to clarify the meaning of the text.
The chart below explains the symbols on the labels.
Serial Number
Date of Manufacture
Manufacturer
CE marking. The device is fully in conformity with the

Council Directive Concerning In Vitro Diagnostic Medical
Devices 98/79/EC.
Authorized Representative in the European
Community
The following definition of the WEEE label applies to EU
member states only: The use of this symbol indicates that
this product should not be treated as household waste. By
ensuring that this product is disposed of correctly, you will
help prevent bringing potential negative consequences to
the environment and human health. For more detailed
information with regard to returning and recycling this
product, please consult the distributor from whom you
purchased the product.
In Vitro diagnostic equipment
Biohazard warning: risk of potentially biohazardous infection
Warning: Risk of personal injury or equipment damage
Warning: risk of burn
Caution: laser radiation
Protective ground terminal
ON (Main Power)
OFF (Main Power)
ON (Power)
OFF (Power)
COM Serial Port
2 Foreword
HIGH CONC.
High-concentration waste
WASTE
HIGH CONC.
High-concentration waste sensor
WASTE SENSOR
LOW CONC.
High-pressure low-concentration waste
WASTE 1
LOW CONC.
Normal-pressure low-concentration waste
WASTE 2
DEIONIZED
Deionized water
WATER
Model:
Product model
BS-400/BS-420
Graphics
All graphics, including screens and printout, are for illustration purposes only and must not be
used for any other purpose.
EC Representative
Name: Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH (Europe)
Address: Eiffestrasse 80 D-20537 Hamburg Germany
Tel: +49 40 2513174
Fax: +49 40 255726
Foreword 3
Safety Precautions
Observe the following safety precautions when using the Chemistry Analyzer. Ignoring any of
these safety precautions may lead to personal injury or equipment damage.
WARNING
If the system is used in a manner not specified by Mindray, the
protection provided by the system may be impaired.
Preventing Electric Shock

Please observe the following instructions to prevent electric shock.
WARNING
When the Main Power is on, users must not open the rear cover or side
cover.
Spillage of reagent or sample on the analyzer may cause equipment
failure and even electric shock. Do not place sample and reagent on the
analyzer. In case of spillage, switch off the power immediately, remove
the spillage.
Preventing Personal Injury Caused by Moving Parts

Please observe the following instructions to prevent personal injury caused by moving parts.
WARNING
Do not touch such moving parts as sample probe, reagent probe, mixer
and wash probe, when the system is in operation.
Do not touch the sample probe or mixer while the system is in operation.
Make sure the reagent disk cover is properly installed.
Preventing Personal Injury Caused by Photometer Lamp

Please observe the following instructions to prevent personal injury caused by
photometer lamp.
WARNING
Light sent by the photometer lamp may hurt your eyes. Do not stare
into the lamp when the system is in operation.
If you want to replace the photometer lamp, first switch off the Main
Power and then wait at least 15 minutes for the lamp to cool down
before touching it. Do not touch the lamp before it cools down, or you
may get burned.
4 Foreword
Preventing Laser Radiation
Please observe the following instructions to prevent personal injury caused by laser radiation.
CAUTION
Light sent by the bar code reader may hurt your eyes. Do not stare into
the laser beam from the bar code reader.
Preventing Infection
Please observe the following instructions to protect against the biohazardous infection.
BIOHAZARD
Inappropriately handling samples, controls and calibrators may lead to
biohazardous infection. Do not touch the sample, mixture or waste with
your hands. Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
In case your skin contacts the sample, control or calibrator, follow
standard laboratory safety procedure and consult a doctor.
Handling Reagents and Wash Solution
WARNING
Reagents, concentrated wash solution and enhanced wash solution
are corrosive to human skins. Exercise caution when using the
reagents, concentrated wash solution and enhanced wash solution. In
case your skin or clothes contact the reagents or wash solution, wash
them off with soap and clean water. In case the reagents or wash
solution spill into your eyes, rinse them with much water and consult an
oculist.
Treating Waste Liquids

Please observe the following instructions to prevent environmental pollution and personal
injury caused by waste.
BIOHAZARD
Some substances in reagent, control, enhanced wash solution and
waste are subject to regulations of contamination and disposal. Dispose
of them in accordance with your local or national guidelines for
biohazard waste disposal and consult the manufacturer or distributor of
the reagents for details.
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
Foreword 5
Treating Waste Analyzer
Please observe the following instructions to dispose of the waste analyzer.
WARNING
Materials of the analyzer are subject to contamination regulations.
Dispose of the waste analyzer in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for waste disposal.
Preventing Fire or Explosion

Please observe the following instructions to prevent fire and explosion.
WARNING
Ethanol is flammable substance. Please exercise caution while using the
ethanol.
6 Foreword
Precautions on Use
To use the Chemistry Analyzer safely and efficiently, please pay much attention to the
following operation notes.
Intended Use
WARNING
The system is a fully-automated and computer-controlled chemistry
analyzer designed for in vitro quantitative determination of clinical
chemistries in serum, plasma, urine and CSF samples. Please consult
Mindray first if you want to use the system for other purposes.
To draw a clinical conclusion, please also refer to the patients clinical
symptoms and other test results.
Operator
WARNING
The system is to be operated only by clinical professionals, doctors or
laboratory experimenters trained by Mindray or Mindray-authorized
distributors.
Environment
CAUTION
Please install and operate the system in an environment specified by
this manual. Installing and operating the system in other environment
may lead to unreliable results and even equipment damage.
Foreword 7
Preventing Interference by Electromagnetic Noise
CAUTION
Electromagnetic noise may interfere with operations of the system. Do
not install devices generating excessive electromagnetic noise around
the system. Do not use such devices as mobile phones or radio
transmitters in the room housing the system. Do not use other CRT
displays around the system.
Do not use other medical instruments around the system that may
generate electromagnetic noise to interfere with their operations.
Do not use this device in close proximity to sources of strong
electromagnetic radiation (e.g. mobile phones or radio transmitters), as
these may interfere with the proper operation.
The electromagnetic environment should be evaluated prior to operation
of the device.
This device has been designed and tested to CISPR 11 Class A, and in
a domestic environment may cause radio interference, in which case,
you may need to take measures to mitigate the interference.
Operating the System
CAUTION
Operate the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate
use of the system may lead to unreliable test results or even equipment
damage or personal injury.
Before using the system for the first time, run the calibration program
and QC program to make sure the system is in proper status.
Be sure to run the QC program every time you use the system,
otherwise the result may be unreliable.
Do not open the covers of the sample disk and reagent disk when the
system is in operation.
The RS-232 port on the analyzing unit is to be used for connection with
the operation unit only. Do not use it for other connections. Only use the
supplied cable for the connection.
The operation unit is a personal computer with the system operating
software installed. Installing other software or hardware on this computer
may interfere with the system operation. Do not run other software when
the system is working.
Computer virus may destroy the operating software or test data. Do not
use this computer for other purposes or connect it to the Internet.
Do not touch the display, mouse or keyboard with wet hands or hands
with chemicals.
Do not place the Main Power to ON again within 10 seconds since
placing it to OFF; otherwise the system may enter protection status. If it
does so, switch off the Main Power and switch it on again.
8 Foreword
Maintaining the System
CAUTION
Maintain the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate
maintenance may lead to unreliable results, or even equipment damage
and personal injury.
To wipe off dust from the system surface, use a soft, clean and wet (not
too wet) cloth, soaked with mild soap solution if necessary, to clean the
surface. Do not use such organic solvents as ethanol for cleaning. After
cleaning, wipe the surface with dry cloth.
Switch off all the powers and unplug the power cord before cleaning.
Take necessary measures to prevent water ingression into the system,
otherwise it may lead to equipment damage or personal injury.
Replacement of such major parts as lamp, photometer, sample probe,
reagent probe, mixer and syringe plunger assembly must be followed by
a calibration.
Samples
CAUTION
Use samples that are completely free of insoluble substances like fibrin,
or suspended matter; otherwise the probe may be blocked.
Medicines, anticoagulants or preservative in the samples may lead to
unreliable results.
Hemolysis, icterus or lipemia in the samples may lead to unreliable test
results, so a sample blank is recommended.
Store the samples properly. Improper storage may change the
compositions of the samples and lead to unreliable results.
Sample volatilization may lead to unreliable results. Do not leave the
sample open for a long period.
Some samples may not be analyzed on the system based on
parameters the reagents claim capable of testing. Consult the reagent
manufacturer or distributor for details.
Certain samples need to be processed before being analyzed by the
system. Consult the reagent manufacturer or distributor for details.
The system has specific requirements on the sample volume. Refer to
this manual for details.
Load the sample to correct position on the sample disk before the
analysis begins; otherwise you will not obtain correct results.
Setting up the System
CAUTION
To define such parameters as sample volume, reagent volume and
wavelength, follow the instructions in this manual and the package insert
of the reagents.
Foreword 9
Reagents, Calibrators and Controls
CAUTION
Use appropriate reagents, calibrators and controls on the system.
Select appropriate reagents according to performance characteristic of
the system. Consult the reagent suppliers, Mindray or
Mindray-authorized distributor for details, if you are not sure about your
reagent choice.
Store and use reagents, calibrators and controls strictly as instructed by
the suppliers. Otherwise, you may not obtain reliable results or best
performance of the system.
Improper storage of reagents, calibrators and controls may lead to
unreliable results and bad performance of the system even in validity
period.
Perform a calibration after changing reagents. Otherwise, you may not
obtain reliable results.
Contamination caused by carryover among reagents may lead to
unreliable test results. Consult the reagent manufacturer or distributor
for details.
Backing up Data
NOTE
The system can automatically store data to the built-in hard disk of the
PC. However, data loss is still possible due to mis-deletion or physical
damage of the hard disk. Mindray recommends you to regularly back up
the data to portable storage device.
Computer and Printer
NOTE
Refer to the operation manuals of computer and printer for details.
External Equipment
WARNING
External equipment connected to the system, such as PC and printer,
shall be consistent with IEC 60950, EN 60950, GB 9254 (Class B),
EN 55022 (Class B) and EN 55024.
10 Foreword
Contents
Warranty ........................................................................................................................... ii
Return Policy .................................................................................................................... ii
Foreword ........................................................................................................... 1
Who Should Read This Manual .......................................................................................1
What Can You Find in This Manual..................................................................................1
Conventions Used in This Manual ...................................................................................1
Safety Precautions ...........................................................................................................4
Precautions on Use ..........................................................................................................7
Contents ............................................................................................................. I
1 System Description .................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 System Components ..................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 Functions ....................................................................................................... 1-3
2 System Performance and Workflow.......................................... 2-1

2.1 Technical Specifications................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 General........................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Specifications for Sample System ................................................. 2-2
2.1.3 Specifications for Reagent System ................................................ 2-4
2.1.4 Specifications of Reaction System................................................. 2-5
2.1.5 Specifications of Operation ............................................................ 2-6
2.1.6 Installation Requirements .............................................................. 2-7
2.1.7 Optional Modules ........................................................................... 2-7
2.2 Timing Principle ............................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.2 Timing ............................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.3 Measuring Points ......................................................................... 2-10
3 Installation Procedures .............................................................. 3-1

3.1 Environmental Requirements ........................................................................ 3-1
3.2 Installation Requirements .............................................................................. 3-2
3.2.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements .......................................... 3-2
3.2.2 Power Requirements ..................................................................... 3-2
3.2.3 Water Supply and Drainage Requirements ................................... 3-2
3.2.4 Connecting Water Supply and Drain Facilities .............................. 3-4
Contents I
3.2.5 Connecting Water Unit(Optional) ................................................... 3-5
3.3 Installation Procedures .................................................................................. 3-9
3.3.1 Checking before Intallation ............................................................ 3-9
3.3.2 Unpacking ...................................................................................... 3-9
3.3.3 Install Drawer and Air Pump ........................................................ 3-13
3.3.4 Install the Probe and the Mixing Bar ............................................ 3-15
3.3.5 Connect the System ..................................................................... 3-21
3.3.6 Powering on ................................................................................. 3-22
3.3.7 Check the Pressure ..................................................................... 3-24
3.3.8 System Prime ............................................................................... 3-25
3.3.9 Fluidic unit empty ......................................................................... 3-30
3.3.10 Operation Software Installation .................................................... 3-32
3.3.11 Run Operating Software .............................................................. 3-33
3.3.12 System Set up & Test................................................................... 3-34
3.3.13 Training ........................................................................................ 3-35
4 Units and Modules ...................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Sample/Reagent Probe Unit .......................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Introduction .................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Components and Structure ............................................................ 4-1
4.1.3 Installation ...................................................................................... 4-4
4.2 Sample Disk Unit ........................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.1 Introduction .................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.2 Components and Structure ............................................................ 4-5
4.2.3 Servicing ........................................................................................ 4-6
4.3 Reagent Disk Unit ........................................................................................ 4-12
4.3.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 4-12
4.3.2 Components and Structure .......................................................... 4-12
4.3.3 Servicing the Reagent Disk Unit .................................................. 4-14
4.4 Reaction Disk Unit ....................................................................................... 4-20
4.4.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 4-20
4.4.3 Replacing Components and Parts ............................................... 4-22
4.4.4 Installing Reaction Disk Drive Part .............................................. 4-22
4.4.5 Installing Reaction Disk Motor Assembly ..................................... 4-24
4.4.6 Installing Coder Sensor Assembly ............................................... 4-25
4.4.7 Installing Reaction Compartment Assembly ................................ 4-26
4.4.8 Installing Reaction Disk Assembly ............................................... 4-27
4.5 Mixer Unit..................................................................................................... 4-28
4.5.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 4-28
4.5.3 Installation .................................................................................... 4-30
4.6 Photometric Unit .......................................................................................... 4-30
4.6.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 4-30
4.6.3 Adjustment of Photometer ........................................................... 4-33
4.6.4 Replacing Optical Assembly ........................................................ 4-39
4.7 Wash Unit .................................................................................................... 4-39
4.7.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 4-39
4.7.2 Functions ...................................................................................... 4-40
4.7.3 Structure and Installation ............................................................. 4-41
4.8 ISE Unit(optional)......................................................................................... 4-42
4.8.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 4-42
II Contents
5 Hydropneumatic System............................................................ 5-1

5.1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................ 5-3
5.3 Schematic Diagram of Fluidic System........................................................... 5-4
5.4 Connectors .................................................................................................... 5-5
5.5 Tubing ............................................................................................................ 5-7
5.6 Solenoid Valves ........................................................................................... 5-22
5.7 Layout of Hydropneumatic Drawer .............................................................. 5-23
5.8 Structure of Air Pump Assembly .................................................................. 5-27
5.9 Water Supply Module(optional) ................................................................... 5-30
5.10 Key Components ......................................................................................... 5-32
6 Hardware ..................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Safety Precautions......................................................................................... 6-1
6.3 Circuit boards................................................................................................. 6-1
6.4 Layout of the boards ...................................................................................... 6-4
6.5 Detaching and Assembling Circuit Boards .................................................... 6-5
6.6 Function of board ........................................................................................... 6-5
6.6.1 Control Framework ........................................................................ 6-5
6.6.2 Main Board ..................................................................................... 6-6
6.6.3 Three-disk Drive Board .................................................................. 6-7
6.6.4 Three-probe Drive Board ............................................................... 6-9
6.6.5 Pre-amp Board ............................................................................. 6-10
6.6.6 AD Conversion Board .................................................................. 6-10
6.6.7 Reagent Refrigeration Board ........................................................6-11
6.6.8 Level Detection Board.................................................................. 6-12
6.6.9 Clot Detection Board .................................................................... 6-13
6.6.10 Pump/Valve Drive Board .............................................................. 6-14
6.6.11 Reaction Disk Temperature Control Board .................................. 6-15
6.6.12 Preheat Temperature Control Board ............................................ 6-15
6.6.13 Communication Board ................................................................. 6-15
6.7 Power Supply Module.................................................................................. 6-16
6.7.1 Features of Power Supply Module............................................... 6-16
6.7.2 Block Diagram .............................................................................. 6-17
6.8 Connection Diagram .................................................................................... 6-19
7 Replacement of Other Components and Parts ........................ 7-1

7.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 7-1
7.2 Enclosure and Panel ..................................................................................... 7-1
7.3 Replacing Valves and Tanks.......................................................................... 7-6
7.4 Installing Sample Syringe ............................................................................ 7-10
7.5 Installing Reagent Syringe............................................................................7-11
7.6 Installing Power Supply Assembly............................................................... 7-12
8 Service and Maintenance ........................................................... 8-1

8.1 Preparation .................................................................................................... 8-2
Contents III
8.1.1 Tools ............................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.2 Wash Solution ................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.3 Others............................................................................................. 8-2
8.2 Daily Maintenance ......................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.1 Checking Sample/Reagent Syringes ............................................. 8-2
8.2.2 Checking/Cleaning Sample Probe ................................................. 8-3
8.2.3 Checking/Cleaning R1/R2 Probes ................................................. 8-3
8.2.4 Checking/Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers ................................. 8-3
8.2.5 Checking Connection of Deionized Water ..................................... 8-3
8.2.6 Checking Waste Tubing ................................................................. 8-4
8.2.7 Checking Vacuum/Pressure Pumps .............................................. 8-4
8.2.8 Checking Printer/Printing Paper .................................................... 8-5
8.2.9 ISE Unit (optional) .......................................................................... 8-5
8.2.10 Checking the Drying Module .......................................................... 8-6
8.3 Weekly Maintenance ..................................................................................... 8-8
8.3.1 Cleaning Sample Probe ................................................................. 8-8
8.3.2 Cleaning R1/R2 Probes ................................................................. 8-9
8.3.3 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers ................................................8-11
8.3.4 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Bar Code Reader Windows .............. 8-12
8.3.5 Cleaning Sample Disk/Compartment........................................... 8-13
8.3.6 Cleaning Reagent Disk/Compartment ......................................... 8-14
8.3.7 Cleaning Panels of Analyzing Unit ............................................... 8-15
8.3.8 Cleaning Reaction Cuvettes ........................................................ 8-15
8.3.9 Checking Photometer .................................................................. 8-15
8.3.10 Checking Concentrated Wash Solution ....................................... 8-21
8.4 Monthly Maintenance .................................................................................. 8-21
8.4.1 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe ......................................... 8-21
8.4.2 Cleaning Wash Well of R1/R2 Probes ......................................... 8-23
8.4.3 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample/Reagent Mixers ......................... 8-24
8.4.4 Cleaning Sample Probe Rotor ..................................................... 8-25
8.4.5 Cleaning R1/R2 Probes Rotors ................................................... 8-25
8.4.6 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers Rotors ................................... 8-26
8.4.7 Checking Wash Unit..................................................................... 8-27
8.4.8 Checking Hydropneumatic Drawer .............................................. 8-30
8.4.9 Cleaning Air Filter, Oil Mist Separator, Mist Separator ................ 8-30
8.4.10 Replacing Reaction Cuvette ........................................................ 8-31
8.5 Three-month Maintenance .......................................................................... 8-35
8.5.1 Cleaning Dust Screens ................................................................ 8-35
8.6 Six-month Maintenance ............................................................................... 8-36
8.6.1 Replacing Lamp ........................................................................... 8-36
8.6.2 Replacing or Cleaning Air Screen ................................................ 8-38
8.6.3 Cleaning Tanks, Floater Switch and Siphon Tube ....................... 8-38
8.6.4 Maintaining the Air Pump ............................................................. 8-39
8.6.5 Replacing Waste Tubing .............................................................. 8-39
8.6.6 Replacing First and Second Phase Washing Tubing on Wash Unit
8-39
8.6.7 Replacing DI Water Filter and the Tubing .................................... 8-40
8.6.8 Replacing On-line Filters.............................................................. 8-41
8.6.9 Wash glass cuvette (Optional) ..................................................... 8-43
8.7 Yearly Maintenance ..................................................................................... 8-47
8.7.1 Maintaining the Air Pump ............................................................. 8-47
8.8 As-Needed Maintenance ............................................................................. 8-49
8.8.1 Unclogging Sample Probe ........................................................... 8-49
8.8.2 Unclogging R1/R2 Probes ........................................................... 8-54
8.8.3 Replacing Sample Probe ............................................................. 8-59
IV Contents
8.8.4 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe ......................................... 8-60
8.8.5 Replacing R1/R2 Probes ............................................................. 8-60
8.8.6 Replacing Sample/Reagent Mixers ............................................. 8-61
8.8.7 Replacing Syringe Plunger Assembly .......................................... 8-63
8.8.8 Removing Air Bubbles.................................................................. 8-65
8.8.9 Replacing Reaction Cuvette ........................................................ 8-66
8.8.10 Washing Glass cuvette (Optional) ............................................... 8-69
8.8.11 Adjust Pressure ............................................................................ 8-69
8.8.12 Replacing Check Valve ................................................................ 8-71
8.9 Maintaining ISE Module(Optional)............................................................... 8-72
8.9.1 Replacing Reagent Pack ............................................................. 8-72
8.9.2 Replacing Electrodes ................................................................... 8-73
8.9.3 Replacing Tubing ......................................................................... 8-73
8.9.4 ISE Unit Storage (optional) .......................................................... 8-74
9 Test and Maintenance Software ................................................ 9-1

9.1 Basic Operations ........................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 Logging On..................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Overview ........................................................................................ 9-1
9.1.3 Operating Commands .................................................................... 9-3
9.2 Macro Instructions ........................................................................................9-11
9.2.1 Function ........................................................................................9-11
9.2.2 Detailed Operations ......................................................................9-11
9.3 Performance ................................................................................................ 9-14
9.3.1 Accuracy and Repeatability of Absorbance ................................. 9-14
9.3.2 Stability of Absorbance................................................................. 9-15
9.3.3 Linearity of Absorbance ............................................................... 9-16
9.3.4 Absorbance Accuracy and Precision of Diluted Sample ............. 9-16
9.3.5 Residue of Cuvette ...................................................................... 9-17
9.3.6 Sampling Accuracy and Precision of Sample Probe ................... 9-17
9.3.7 Carryover of Sample Probe ......................................................... 9-17
9.3.8 Backwater .................................................................................... 9-18
9.3.9 Stability and Drift of Absorbance .................................................. 9-18
9.4 Parameter .................................................................................................... 9-20
9.4.1 Detailed Operations ..................................................................... 9-20
10 Troubleshooting ....................................................................... 10-1

10.1 Classification of Error Messages ................................................................. 10-1
10.2 Corrective Measures ................................................................................... 10-3
10.2.1 Failures of Operation Unit ............................................................ 10-4
10.2.2 Failures of Analyzing Unit .......................................................... 10-13
11 Calculation Methods................................................................. 11-1

11.1 Reaction Types .............................................................................................11-1
11.1.1 Endpoint ........................................................................................11-1
11.1.2 Fixed-time .....................................................................................11-5
11.1.3 Kinetic............................................................................................11-8
11.1.4 QC Rule ......................................................................................11-14
11.2 Prozone Check ...........................................................................................11-15
11.2.1 Antigen Addition ..........................................................................11-16
11.2.2 Reaction Rate Method ................................................................11-17
11.3 Serum Index ...............................................................................................11-19
Contents V
11.3.1 What is Serum Index...................................................................11-19
11.3.2 Calculation of Serum Index .........................................................11-20
VI Contents
1 System Description
1.1 Overview
The system is a fully-automated and computer-controlled chemistry analyzer
designed for in vitro quantitative determination of clinical chemistries in serum,
plasma, urine and CSF (Cerebrospinal fluid) samples. The Chemistry Analyzer
consists of the analyzing unit (analyzer) and operation unit.
Figure 1-1 Analyzing Unit and Operation Unit
1 System Description 1-1

1.2 System Components
The system has a throughput of 400 tests/hour for single- or double-reagent analysis.
Each working period is equivalent to 9 seconds. Structurally, the system realizes the
three-disk + three-probe + two-mixer scheme, which means one reaction disk, one
sample disk, one reagent disk, two reagent probes, one sample probe, one sample
mixer and one reagent mixer. The two reagent probes aspirate and dispense R1 and
R2, and the two mixers stir S(sample) and R2.The photometric system, which is
composed of gratings and diode array, perform photometric measurement to the
reaction cuvettes that hold sample/reagent mixture. When analysis is finished, the
wash unit cleans the reaction cuvettes during 8 phases.
Figure 1-2 Layout of the system panel
1-2 1 System Description

Figure 1-3 System structure
Wash unit
Sample mixer Reagent mixer
Sample probe
R1 probe Reaction disk
R2 probe Sample disk
Reagent disk
Hydropneumati
c assembly
1.3 Functions
The general working procedure of the system is as follows:
1. All mechanical units are initialized.
2. The reaction cuvettes are washed during 8 phases. After phase 6, water blank
is analyzed automatically.
3. The reagent disk rotates to R1 aspirate position, and R1 probe aspirates

reagent from a bottle on the reagent disk.
4. When washed for 8 phases, the reaction cuvettes are carried to the reagent
dispense position, and the R1 probe rotates to the reaction disk and dispenses
the reagent to a cuvette.
5. R1 is incubated in reaction cuvette for several periods.
6. The sample disk rotates to the sample aspirate position, and the sample probe
aspirates designated amount of sample from specified sample tube.
7. The reaction cuvette with R1 dispensed rotates to the sample dispense

position, and the sample probe dispenses the sample in the reaction cuvette.
8. With sample dispensed, the reaction cuvette rotates to sample mixing position
for stirring.
9. In case of double-reagent tests, when sample is dispensed, the reagent disk

rotates to the R2 aspirate position, and the R2 probe aspirates reagent from
the specified bottle on the reagent disk.
1 System Description 1-3

10. The reaction disk with sample dispensed rotates to the R2 dispensing position,
and the R2 probe dispenses the reagent to a reaction cuvette.
11. With R2 dispensed, the reaction cuvette is carried to the reagent mixing
position for stirring.
12. During each period, the reaction cuvette receives photometric measurement
(absorbance reading taking) when passing by the photometric unit.
13. Triple-/quadruple-reagent analysis is similar to single-/double-reagent analysis

stated above. As for triple- or quadruple-reagent tests, the reaction cuvette
with R2 dispensed will not be washed when passing by the wash unit.
14. The reaction cuvettes in which reaction is finished are washed when passing
by the wash unit.
Table 1-1 Functions of system units

Unit Name Description
Sample probe unit Aspirates and dispenses samples for all chemical
and ISE tests.
Sample Disk Unit 90 positions. Holds samples to be analyzed.
R1 probe unit Aspirates and dispenses R1 and R3 for all
chemical tests.
R2 probe unit Aspirates and dispenses R2 and R4 for all
chemical tests.
Reagent Disk Unit 80 positions. Holds bottles containing reagents
and wash solution.
Reaction Disk Unit 90 cuvette positions. It provides an environment in
which sample reacts with reagents.
Reagent mixer unit Stirs the mixture in reaction cuvette when R2 is
dispensed.
Sample mixer unit Stirs the mixture in reaction cuvette when sample
is dispensed.
Photometric Unit Performs photometric measurement (absorbance
reading) at 12 wavelengths with the gratings
system.
Wash Unit Cleans reaction cuvettes during 8 phases.
ISE Unit(optional) Measures the concentration of Na+, K+, Cl- and
Li+ in serum, plasma and diluted urine.
1-4 1 System Description

2 System Performance
and Workflow
2.1 Technical Specifications
2.1.1 General
System
Random, multi-channel, multi-test
System structure
Analyzing unit plus Operation unit(PC)
Sample type
Serum, urine and plasma
Number of simultaneous measurements
38 double-reagent tests/77 single-reagent tests
Throughput
40010 test/h tests/hour, or
56010 tests/hour with ISE unit
Analytical method
Endpoint, Kinetic, Fixed-time;
2 System Performance and Workflow 2-1

Supporting single-/double-/triple-/quadruple-reagent tests;
Supporting single-/double-wavelength tests
Reaction time
Maximum of 10 minutes
Reaction temperature
370.1
Test scope
Clinical chemistries, immunoassays, TDM (Therapeutic Drug Monitoring)
Predilution
Dilution ratio < 150. Dilution is done in reaction cuvette.
Operation mode
System and tests are configured via the operating software. Profiles and
calculation tests are allowed.
Data processing
Capable of storing and outputting various data and tables/graphs, and

calculating among different tests
Dimensions
lwh:1185 mm710 mm1150 mm.
Weight
25015 kg
Emergent samples
Emergent samples can be inserted during measurement at any time.
Network connection
Able to be connected with LIS (Laboratory Information Management System)
2.1.2 Specifications for Sample System

Sample loading
Samples are loaded via the sample disk.
Sample tube type
Microtube: 1237mm, 1425mm;
Blood collecting tube: 1268.5 mm, 1299 mm, 12.775 mm, 12.7100 mm,
13 X 75 mm, 13 X 95 mm, 13 X 100 mm;
2-2 2 System Performance and Workflow

Plastic tube: 1268.5 mm, 1299 mm, 12.775 mm, 12.7100 mm, 13
X 75 mm, 13 X 95 mm, 13 X 100 mm.
Sample inventory
The level of samples should be higher than 5mm.
Sample disk
Ordinary sample disk, including inner, middle and outer circles
Sample positions on sample disk
90 positions, which include the positions for calibrators, contros, STAT samples
and diluted samples
STAT sample
Emergent samples can be inserted during measurement at any time and then
run with high priority.
Sample volume
Biochemistries:2l-45l, with increment of 0.1l
ISE:Serum and plasma:70l. Diluted urine:140l.
Sample probe
One probe, which is capable of detecting liquid level, clots and obstruction (in
horizontal and vertical directions), and of tracking liquid level
Sample probe washing
Inside and outside of the probe are washed with carryover less than 0.1%.
Sample entering mode
Bar code system, etc
Table 2-1 Specifications of sample bar code

Name Description
Symbology Codabar, ITF(interleaved 2 of 5), code128, code39,
UPC/EAN and Code93
Maximum bar 0.19mm
code density
Total length 3-27 digits
Bar code User-defined
format and
contents
Max. width of 55mm
bar code level
Min. height of 10mm
bar code label
Max. inclination 5 degree
angle
Print quality No less than class C (ANSI MH10.8M)
Wide and 2.5:1 to 3.0:1
narrow ratio

2.1.3 Specifications for Reagent System
Reagent loading
All reagents are loaded via the reagent disk.
Reagent bar code
The reagent bar code is in conformity with the NCCLS standard and also
compatible with various application environments. The total length of reagent bar
code is within 15-30 digits.
Table 2-2 Specifications of reagent bar code
Name Description
Symbology Codabar, I 2 of 5 (interleaved 2 of 5), code128, code39,
UPC/EAN and Code93
Maximum bar 0.19mm
code density
Total length 13-30 digits
Bar code User-defined
format and
contents
Max. width of 55mm
bar code level
Min. height of 10mm
bar code label
Max. 5 degree
inclination
angle
Print quality No less than class C (ANSI MH10.8M)
Wide and 2.5:1
narrow ratio
Reagent refrigeration
Refrigeration temperature: 2-10
Reagent dispensing
Reagent is aspirated and dispensed precisely by syringes.
Reagent types
1 to 4 reagent types, R1, R2, R3 and R4
Reagent volume
20l-350l, with increment of 1l
Reagent disk
Ordinary reagent disk, including inner and outer circles, 80 positions in total
Reagent bottle
80 reagent bottles can be held on the reagent disk.
Mindray Reagent bottles:outer-ring 20ml/40ml and Mindray inner-ring 40ml/62ml

bottles.

Reagent probe
Two separate probes, which are capable of detecting liquid level and
obstructions (in horizontal and vertical directions), and tracking liquid level
Reagent probe washing
Inside and outside of the probe are washed with carryover less than 0.1%.
Reagent inventory
Less than 300l
Methods to prevent reagent carryover
User-defined. Reagent probes are washed with enhanced wash solution.
2.1.4 Specifications of Reaction System

Optical path of reaction cuvette
5mm
Material of reaction cuvette
5mm5mm29mm, semi-permanent plastic reaction cuvette
Number of reaction cuvettes
90
Stirring method
Two separate mixers, which stir samples and R2/R3/R4 respectively
Reaction liquid volume
150-360l
Photometric system
Static fiber transmission, and reversed optics of holographic concave flat-field

gratings
Wavelength
12 wavelengths, which are 340nm, 380nm, 412nm, 450nm, 505nm, 546nm,

570nm, 605nm, 660nm, 700nm, 740nm and 800nm
Light source
12V, tungsten-halogen lamp, 20W
The light is transmitted through the fibers.
Gratings type
Reversed optics of holographic concave flat-field gratings
Wavelength accuracy
2nm

Minimum reaction liquid volume
150l
Photometric measurement method
Photodiode array
Number of simultaneous wavelength for each test
One or two wavelengths
Measurement range
0-3A; optical path: 10mm
Resolution of photometer
0.0001A
2.1.5 Specifications of Operation

Calibration method
Linear (one-point, two-point and multi-point), Logit-Log 4p, Logit-Log 5p, Spline,
Exponential, Polynomial and Parabola
Display
15 LCD
Operating system
Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XPWindows Vista is compatible
QC(quality control) rule
Westgard multi-rule, Cumulative sum check and Twin Plot
Communication interface
RS-232
Printer
Ink jet printer, laser printer (black-white) and stylus printer
Input device
Keyboard, network
Output device
Display, printer and LIS host
Storage device
Hard disk, USB port

2.1.6 Installation Requirements
Power requirements
AC 220-240V, 50Hz, 1500VA; AC 220/230V, 60Hz, 1500VA; AC 110/115V, 60Hz,

1500VA
Water consumption
<25L/hour
Operating environment
Storage temperature: 0-40, fluctuation<2/H
Storage humidity: 30%RH-85%RH, without condensation
Operating temperature: 15-30, fluctuation<2/H
Operating humidity: 35%RH-85%RH, without condensation
Above-sea-level height: No more than 2000 meters
2.1.7 Optional Modules

ISE(Ion Selective Electrode) module
Drainage module
Water supply module
2.2 Timing Principle

2.2.1 Overview
Figure 2-1 General Test Procedure of the system
2.2.2 Timing
2.2.2.1 Timing for Sample Probe
a. Washing inside and outside of the sample probe

b. Lifting up from the wash well
c. Rotating to top of sample disk
d. Lowering down to sample tube
e. Aspirating sample and dispensing back a little
f. Lifting up from sample tube
g. Rotating to top of reaction disk
h. Lowering down to reaction cuvette
i. Dispensing sample
j. Lifting up from reaction cuvette
k. Rotating to top of wash well
l. Lowering down to wash well
Go to next period
2.2.2.2 Timing for R1 Probe

a. Rotating to top of reaction disk
b. Lowering down to reaction cuvette
c. Dispensing R1
d. Lifting up from reaction cuvette
e. Rotating to top of wash well
f. Lowering down to wash well
g. Washing inside and outside of the probe
h. Lifting up from the wash well
i. Rotating to top of reagent disk
j. Lowering down to reagent bottle
k. Aspirating R1
l. Lifting up from reagent bottle
Go to next period
2.2.2.3 Timing for R2 Probe

a. Washing inside and outside of the R2 probe
b. Lifting up from the wash well
c. Rotating to top of reagent disk
d. Lowering down to reagent bottle
e. Aspirating R2

f. Lifting up from reagent bottle
g. Rotating to top of reaction disk
h. Lowering down to reaction cuvette
i. Dispensing R2
j. Lifting up from reaction cuvette
k. Rotating to top of wash well
l. Lowering down to wash well
Go to next period
2.2.2.4 Timing for Reagent Mixer and Sample Mixer

a. Lifting up from the wash well
b. Rotating to top of reaction disk
c. Lowering down to reaction cuvette
d. Stirring reaction liquid
e. Lifting up from reaction cuvette
f. Rotating to top of wash well
g. Lowering down to wash well
h. Washing reagent and sample mixers
2.2.2.5 Timing for Reaction Disk

The reaction disk can hold 90 reaction cuvettes. During each period, the reaction disk rotates
clockwise, rotating and stopping for 2 times, and passes 91 cuvettes(50+41), that is, the reaction
disk finally stops at the next position of the clockwise direction.
Figure 2-2 Timing of Reaction Disk

2.2.3 Measuring Points
Figure 2-3 Measuring Points for Single-reagent tests
R1(R1 probe)
S(Sample probe) Reaction end
Wash Cuvette
1'52" 10'05"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 22 90# period
Figure 2-4 Measuring Points for Double-reagent tests

R1(R1 probe)
S(Sample probe)
R2(R2 probe) Reaction end
Wash cuvette
1'52" 4'30" 5'35"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 22 52 90# period
Figure 2-5 Measuring Points for Triple-reagent tests

R1(R1 probe)
S(Sample probe)
R2(R2 probe) Continue
Wash cuvette
1'52" 4'30" 5'44"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 22 52 90# period
Go to next cycle
R3(R1 probe)
1'24" M3(Reagent mixer)
Stop washing Reaction end

23" 11'34"
90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 100 102 180# period
Figure 2-6 Measuring Points for Quadruple-reagent tests

R1(R1 probe)
S(Sample probe)
R2(R2 probe) Continue
Wash cuvette
1'52" 4'30" 5'44"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 22 52 90# period
Go to next cycle
R3(R1 probe)
1'24" R4(R2 probe)
Stop washing Reaction end

6'22" 5'35"
90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 100 142 180# period

3 Installation
Procedures
3.1 Environmental Requirements

The altitude height of the installation site should be lower than 2000 meters.
The system is for indoor use only.
The bearing platform (or ground) should be level with gradient less than
1/200.
The bearing platform (or ground) should be able to bear 350Kg weight.
The installation site should be well ventilated.
The installation site should be free of dust as much as possible.
The installation site should not be in direct sun.
The installation site should not be close to a heat or draft source.
The installation site should be free of corrosive gas and flammable gas.
The bearing platform (or ground) should be free of vibration.
The installation site should not be disturbed by great noise or power supply.
The system should not be placed near brush-type motors and electrical
contacts that are frequently powered on and off.
Do not use such devices as mobile phones or radio transmitters near the
system. Electromagnetic waves generated by those devices may interfere
with operation of the system.
3 Installation Procedures 3-1

Ambient temperature: 15-30, with fluctuation less than 2/H.
Ambient humidity: 35%RH-80%RH, without condensation.
If the temperature or relative humidity does not meet the above-mentioned

requirements, be sure to use air-conditioning equipment.
The analyzer should be installed near a drainage sewer.
3.2 Installation Requirements

3.2.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements
Figure 3-1 Space and accessibility requirements
3.2.2 Power Requirements

Power supply: AC 220-240V, 50Hz; AC 220/230V, 60Hz; AC 110/115V, 60Hz.
Three-wire power cord and properly grounded.
The system should be connected to a properly grounded power socket.
The distance between the power socket and the system should be less than
2.5 meters.
Make sure the power socket is grounded correctly. Improper grounding may
lead to electric shock and/or equipment damage.
Be sure to connect the system to a power socket that meets the

above-mentioned requirements and has a proper fuse installed.
3.2.3 Water Supply and Drainage Requirements

Water: The water must meet requirements of the CAP Type II water.
Water pressure: 100~392kPa
3-2 3 Installation Procedures

Continuous flow should be no less than 30L/H, and the peak flow no greater
than 60L/H. The water unit that has a flow of 25L/H must be equipped with
an accumulator of above 40L.
Water temperature: 5-32.
The water used on the system is supplied by a wash unit or other pressure
water supply.
When the supply water pressure ia above 100kPa, the water can be supplied
directly to the instrument.
When the water pressure is below 100kPa, a water supply module should be
equipped to supply the water.
No matter what kind of water supply mode is chosen (water unit or water supply
module), a filter device should be installed between the inlet of the analyzer and
water supply device.
Tubing between Water supply module and the analyzer
a. The tubing between the inlet and outlet of the water supply module or
other water supply devices must not exceed 10 meters.
b. If water is supplied directly to the analyzer, a filter should be installed

between the water supply and the analyzer.
c. If a water supply module is used to supply the water, the filter should be
installed in the tubing between the outlet of the water supply module and
the inlet of he analyzer. A water tank is recommended to placed in the
inlet of the water supply module in order to keep the stability and
consistency of the water supply. The volume of the water tank is
80-120L.The tubing between the water supply module and the water
tank is not longer than 5m
d. The tubing from VENT of the water supply module to the sewer must not
exceed 10m.
e. The water supply module should be placed on the ground.
The inlet filter should be placed on the ground.
The system drains away the low-concentration waste directly.
The tubing from the outlet on the system to the waste sewer must not
exceed 5 meters.
The waste sewer must be higher than the ground within 100mm.
Drainage module:
a. A drainage module is required if the environmental conditions for waste

discharge are not met.
b. The tubing between the outlet on analyzer and inlet of drainage module
must not exceed 5 meters.
c. The tubing between the outlet of drainage module and the sewer must
not exceed 10 meters.

d. The sewer must be within 1200mm higher than the ground.
e. The drainage module should be placed on the ground.
The high-concentration waste bucket should be placed on the ground. The

tubing between the outlet on analyzer and the high-concentration waste
bucket must not exceed 2 meters.
3.2.4 Connecting Water Supply and Drain Facilities

Figure 3-2 Standard Configuration
Analyzer
Water
supply
Inlet
filter Max:100
mm
Standard configuration High conc.

waste tank
sewer sewer
Figure 3-3 Optional Components
Analyzer
Inlet filter
sewer Max.:1200
mm
Water
supply
IN1 IN2 OUT

OUT OUT
IN
1 2
Water supply Drainage High conc.

module module Waste tank
sewer sewer
Optional parts

Figure 3-4 Connectors of the analyzer
High conc.waste sensor
cable
Water
supply Inlet filer
High conc. waste
tubing
Drainage module
overflow sensor
cable (optional)
Low conc. Waste
outlet2
Low conc.waste
outlet1
Analyzer fluidic
interfaces
Figure 3-5 Water Supply Module and Drainage Module
Connecting Connecting Connecting

sewer water supply analyzer via filter Normal pressure Connecting
low conc.waste waste outlet
High pressure
low conc.waste
low low
Air vent Inlet outlet conc.waste outlet
conc.waste
1 2
Drainage module
Water supply module
3.2.5 Connecting Water Unit(Optional)

If the user employs a water unit to supply water to the analyzer, an adapter is
required to connect the irregular outlet tubing of the water unit to the inlet filter (or
water supply module) of the analyzer.
There are three types of outlet tubing for the water unit: 1/4 tubing, 1/3 tubing
and 1/2 tubing. All of these three tubings are made from hard materials.
The Chemistry Analyzer provides three types of adapters, which include M22,
M32 and M42. The three adapters are supplied in 2 respectively together with
two pairs of big and small stoppers.

Figure 3-6 Adapters of different sizes
If the outlet tubing of the water unit has an external diameter of 1/4, you should
use an M22 adapter to connect the outlet tubing to the transparent 6*4 PU tubing
of the analyzer. Perform the following steps to apply the adapter:
1. Unscrew the caps from the M22 adapter.

Figure 3-7 M22 adapter
2. Thread the 6*4 PU tubing through the nut cap and make it protrude about
3-5mm from the middle hole in the cap; then apply a small stopper on the PU
tubing, avoiding loose connection between the two tubings.
Figure 3-8 Applying tubing stopper to PU tubing
3. Thread the 1/4 outlet tubing through the middle hole of the other nut cap,
making the tubing protrude for about 3-5mm from the middle hole; and then
insert the tubing into the stopper connecting the PU tubing. Check if the outlet
tubing is connected tightly to the adpater; if not, apply a small stopper on the
outlet tubing.

Figure 3-9 Applying tubing stopper to 1/4 tubing
4. Screw the adapter to the nut caps.
Figure 3-10 Connecting nut caps
5. If the outlet tubing of the water unit has an external diameter of 1/3, you
should use an M23 adapter to connect the outlet tubing to the transparent 6*4
PU tubing of the analyzer.
Figure 3-11 1/3 tubing

Figure 3-12 Connecting 1/3 tubing to PU tubing
3.3 Installation Procedures

3.3.1 Checking before Intallation
After understanding the installation requirements, the service engineers should
go to the installation site and check the following items.
1. Check the delivery list for acceptance.
One wooden case for main instrument
One paper box for accessories
One paper box for high concentration tank
Water inlet module and waste outlet module
2. Make one copy of original parameter configuration list as back up. The list
should be kept carefully by both the service engineer and the end user.
3.3.2 Unpacking
1. Detach the wooden case as follows.
a. Gross weight is 35020 kg, totally 8 people are needed to lay the wooden
case containing the main unit on the ground. Fork truck is recommended, if
possible.
b. Loosen the screws on the top cover and side cover of the wooden case.

Figure3-13 Side cover of the wooden case
Figure 3-14 Top cover of the wooden case
Figure 3-15Remove one side of the side cover
Use adjustable wrench to loosen the screws on the base. Remove the steel
part.

Figure 3-16 Steel part
Use adjustable wrench to loosen the four retaining screws on the feet.
Figure 3-17Feet
Use a hex wrench or a screwdriver to rotate the feet to the highest point.
Please make sure that the diameter of the hex wrench or the screwdriver
should be 5-6 mm to avoid distortion.
Figure 3-18Screws on the feet
The padding par t is fixed to the right side cover. Loosen the 2 retaining screws
to remove the padding part.

Figure 3-19 Padding part
Install the padding part to the base.
Figure 3-20 Install the padding part
Move the instrument down to the floor. Put the wooden plate and retaining
screws aside in a specified place.

Figure 3-21Move the instrument to the floor
3.3.3 Install Drawer and Air Pump

Fix the analyzer: after moving the analyzer to the installation site, rotate the
four screws of the analyzer to lift the analyzer above the floor and ensure the
four feet stand firmly on the ground.
Remove the retaining screws as shown in the following figure3 and remove
the cover.
Figure 3-22 Retaining screws on the cover
Remove the 9 screws shown in the following figure and remove the drawer
package fixing plate.

Figure 3-23 8 screws on the drawer package fixing plate and 1 screw on the
drawer handle
Pull the drawer out and check whether the drawer assembly is running
smoothly and tubings are well connected.
Figure 3-24Hydropneumatic drawer
Manually turn on the ball valve (horizontal position-on, vertical position-off).
Figure 3-25 Open the ball valve
Set the bottome cover back.

Figure 3-26 Install the bottom cover
Remove the two retaining screws of the air pump from the base plate of the
frame. Please insert the cross-head screwdriver into the bottom of the screw
hole to remove the screw. It is not necessary to elevate the analyzer to locate
the screws.
Figure 3-27 Air pump fixing screws
3.3.4 Install the Probe and the Mixing Bar

Remove the package and plastics on the plate.
Take the reagent and sample probe out from the accessory. Please make sure
to put the white gasket into the mental adapter of the probes.

Figure 3-28 Gasket and probe
Remove the probe enclosure: Use both of your hands to pull the bottom of the
enclousure to both sides and lift it up.
Move the probe arm to the highest point and remove the retaining bolt and
spring.
Install the probes on to the arms. Please ensure that the probe can move
upward and downward after fixed onto the retaining bolt.

Connect the Teflon tubing with the probe. Please use one hand to pinch the
probe mental adapter to avoid excessive force on the probe adapter jointing
point.
Connect the probe line to the level-sensing board.

After installation is completed, ensure the stop plate is shielding the collision
sensor.
Power on the analyzer after confirming that the sample probe is not in contact
with any conductible matter (like hands).
Manual adjustment: Obeserve the D2 indicator (yellow). The D2 indicator will

be on 2 seconds after the power of the analyzer is on. Press the switch of the
level sensing board S2. D2 indicator also goes through a process of OFF-ON
procedure which indicates the adjustment is successfully completed. (During
the process of adjustment, please make sure the probe is not in contact with
any conductible matter).
Install the enclosure

Take the mixing bar out from the accessory. Move the mixer arm to the highest
vertical point.
Install the mixing bar retaining screw on the installing hole of the mixing bar.
Do not fasten it.
Fasten the retaining screw of the mixing bar. Check whether the mixing bar is
vertical. If not, reinstall it.

Check whether the sample disk and reagent disk is well installed. Check
whether the spring screw is fastened.
Checking Light Source Assembly
Loosen the screws on the back cover using a screw driver. Check the fixing
conditions of the lamp.
1. Make sure there is no gap between the lamp and its base. Check if the retaining
screws are loosening.

2. Check if the terminal is fixed. Make sure the wires are connected properly.
3. Reinstall the back cover after checking. Screw the screws manually, thus making
the lamp replacement become easier in the future.
3.3.5 Connect the System

Connect the tubing according to 3.2.4 Connecting Water Supply and Drain
Facilities. Please ensure that the inlet tubing of the filter is connected to the
outlet of the water machine (or water supply module), and outlet tubing to
analyzer. If user chooses to use water supply module to pump water from the
water bucket, the end connected to the bucket should be loaded with heavy
adapter.
Fill concentrated wash solution: pull the drawer out and open the cap of the
concentrated wash solution. Fill the bottole with 1L concentrated wash solution.
Fasten the cap.
Place the concentrated reagent box

Unscrew the cap of a new bottle of concentrated wash solution and insert the
cap assembly into the reagent box and then fasten the cap properly. Place the
reagent box onto its proper holder.
Note: the tubing of the cap assembly should be inserted to the bottom of the
reagent box vertically.
If UPS is installed, make sure it is properly grounded.
Connect the analyzer, PC, printer, water machine (or water supply module),
drainage module cable. Do not Place the Power to On.
Connect the PC with the analyzer through serial port cable.
Manually turn on the ball valve (horizontal position-on, vertical position-off).
3.3.6 Powering on
Turn on the water unit or water supply module(Optional) and switch on the drainage
module(optional)
Turn on the main power switch of the analyzer.
Turn on the power switch of the operation unit, wait for 30 s (while the middle
layer unit is downloading the parameters.)
Switch on the computer and the operating software runs automatically once
startup. Use the following account to log on: user name BSMINDRAY; password:
MINDRAY#BS. Note: please choose quick mode to skip the home procedures.

When exiting fhe software, please select emergency exit to skip the shutdown
procedure.
Set the screen resolution to 1024768.
Cancel the standby status of the operating system and screen saver: on the
display property-screen saver window, select none for the screen saver. Click
power supply button to enter power supply property.

Run the software by directly clicking its icon
Execute Mechanical Parts Home instruction for the middle layer unit. Observe if
the operation is normal.Firstly the five probes rise to the vertical home position,
and then rotate to the horizontal home position and finally return to the wash
well.Meanwhile the wash station rises to vertical home position. When the five
probes finish their operations, three disks start to rotate, finding their home
positions and rotating to their given position. 90# cuvette on the reaction risk
rotates to under the phase 1 wash probe of the wash station; the no.1 reagent
position on the reagent disk rotates to the Probe 1 aspirating position; the no.1
sample position rotates to the sample probe aspirating position.
3.3.7 Check the Pressure

Before checking the pressure, please ensure the water supply is connected and
the water level reaches high level.
First click Establish pressure and vacuum. Wait for 30 seconds until the
pressure is stable to enter the pressure curve display screen. Check whether
the pressure of 25PSI, 10PSI, 5PSI and VACUUM are stable.

Figure 3-1 Establish pressure and vacuum
Please refer to table 5-4 for normal range.
3.3.8 System Prime

Before executing System Prime, make sure the water level reaches high level.
1Prime the water tank and the external of the five probes
Select Wash/Prime water tank and probe exits and click Execute. The system
will prime the water tank and the external of the five probes. It will take about 2
minutes for the whole procedure to be completed. Since the water flow is very
small, please check whether the water flows out in the wash well carefully. Note:
no water flows out in the wash unit.

Figure 3-2 Prime the water tank and the external of the five probes
2Prime the interior of the three probes
Use the test and maintenance software to move the probes to the wash well.
Click the following area (indicated in red circle) to turn on the SV02, SV03 and
SV04. When the water flows out of the probes stably, turn off the solenoid vavles.
Note: While priming the probes, please ensure all the covers are in the right
place to avoid splash. If splash happens, clear it with clean paper.

Figure 3-3 Prime the interior of the three probes
3Prime the concentrated wash solution

Select Concentrated wash pirme and click Execute. The system will prime
the concentrated wash solution, which will take about 2 minutes. When the
concentrated wash solution reaches high level, the prime is completed.
Figure 3-4 Prime the concentrated wash solution
4. Prime the diluted wash solution
Select Diluted wash pirme and click Execute. The system will prime the
diluted wash solution. When the diluted wash solution reaches high level, the
prime is completed.

Figure 3-5 Prime the diluted wash solution
5Prime auto wash
Click Mechinical reset in Main unit. When resetting is completed, remove

the wash unit from the system and place it into a container (vol>300ml). Enter
the Liquid unit of the software. Turn on the SV06, SV07, SVV13, SVV30, SVV21.
When water can flow stably from the 1-6 probes of the wash unit, turn off these
solenoid vavles. Clear the tips of these probes and intall the wash unit back onto
the system. Click Auto wash prime in Fluidic unit, and click Execute. The
system will prime the wash unit until completion.
Execute mechanical resetting
Figure 3-6 Execute mechanical resetting
Turn on&turn off SV06, SV07, SVV10, SVV20, SVV21.

Figure 3-7 Turn on solenoid valves
Figure 3-8 Prime auto wash
Click Mechnical reset in Main unit to execute the mechanical resetting to

observe the whether the movement is normal: The five probes first rise to the
vertical home position and then rotates to the horizontal home position. The
thress probes will execute washing above the wash well and then drop down to
the wash well to wash ( check whether flow out from the wash well). The mixing
bar lowers down to the wash well to wash. The wash unit rises to the vertical
home position. When the movement of the five probes is completed, the three
disks began to rotate. After locating the home position, the disk will rotate to the
specified position, which means the 90# cuvette will stop at the first phase probe

of the wash unit and the 1# position of the reagent disk will stop at the R1 probe
aspiration position.
3.3.9 Fluidic unit empty

1. Primary Vaccum Tank
Click Release pressure and vacuum in Fluidic unit. Upon completion, click
Primary vaccum tank drainage. It will take 30 seconds to complete the
emptying procedure. If the primary vacuum container can not be completely
emptied the first time, click Primary vaccum tank drainage again.
2. Primary pressure container

Click Establish pressure and vacuum. After the procedure is completed, check
whether the pressure is normal in Fluidic pressure curve. Click Drain
condensation moisture in Fluidic unit. It will take 25 seconds for the procedure
to be completed. If the primary container can not be emptied the first time, click
Drain condensation moisture again.
3. Empty high and low concentration waste tank
Enter the Fluidic unit of the software and turn on the SV11, SV12, SV15, which
will take 10 seconds. Check whether the high and low concentration tank is
emptied. If yes, turn off the SV11, SV12, SV15.

3.3.10 Operation Software Installation
1. Install MSDE database
Turn on the computer. Access folder MSDE in system software Installation

program, Double click icon as below to start installation.
2. Install the operating software
a) Double-click installation icon named setup as below:
b) Click Next to the next step, make sure 10G space is available on the
target disk. Then click Next.
c) Click the Install button.

d) Select the default language. Then software installation is completed.
3. Install the driver and connect the printer.
3.3.11 Run Operating Software

1. Access software with user name: Admin, password: MINDRAY.

2. Set one test as water, apply one test (water acts as both sample and reagent)
and duplicates 90 times, check the 90 reaction cuvettes carefully, make sure all
reaction cuvettes are in good condition.
3.3.12 System Set up & Test

1. Finish test, reagent and calibrator settings on the Setup, Reagent and
Calibration screens, and then conduct a double-reagent blank.
2. Request for calibration and samples after editing them, and then debug the
results.
3. After debugging the results, fill them in the table below.
Test ALT CREA BUN

Target value
2sd range
Test value 1
Test value 2
Test value 3
Test value 4
Test value 5
Test value 6
Test value 7
Test value 8
Test value 9
Test value 10

3.3.13 Training
Can you complete daily tests? Yes No
Are you familiar with the test methods such as kinetic, two-point, endpoint?
Yes No
Are you familiar with the daily, weekly and monthly maintenance and relevant
maintenance methods? Yes No
Are you skilled in cleaning, washing and replacing the probe and mixing bar?
Yes No
Are you skilled in replacing the lamp? Yes No
Do you know the positions, roles and preparation methods of acid and alkaline
detergents and diluents? Yes No

4 Units and Modules
4.1 Sample/Reagent Probe Unit
4.1.1 Introduction
The sample/reagent probe unit consists of the sample probe, R1 probe and R2 probe
assemblies, which are often called Three-probe Assembly.
The sample probe assembly includes a sample probe, which aspirates sample from
the sample tube and then dispenses it into reaction cuvette. The R1/R2 probe
assembly includes R1 probe and R2 probe, which respectively aspirate R1/R3 and
R2/R4 and then dispense them into reaction cuvettes.
Generally, all of the three probes are capable of detecting liquid level and
obstructions in the horizontal and vertical directions.
Additionally, the probes are also able to limit their mechanical motions or lock
themselves when power failure occurs.
The general workflow of the Three-probe Assembly is as follows:
1. Sample probe assembly: Wash wellSample aspirate positionSample

dispense position on reaction disk/ISE sample entry port;
2. Reagent probe assembly: Wash wellReagent aspirate positionReagent

dispense position on reaction disk.
4.1.2 Components and Structure

The Three-probe Assembly consists of the drive part and the probe arms. See Figure
4-1.
4 Units and Modules 4-1

The drive part supports the probe arm and drives the arm to move vertically or
horizontally, so that the sample probe and reagent probes move among different
positions.
The drive part includes the horizontal movement structure and vertical movement
structure. Both structures have stepper motors, synchronous belt wheel and
synchronous belt. Integrated with a bracket, the two structures finally drive vertically
or horizontally the probe arm via the 12 shaft.
The probe arms are composed of the sample/reagent probes, liquid level detection
board, arm cover, arm base, 130 arm, etc, which are integrated by the arm base and
130 arm.
Besides the structural difference, the three probe assemblies differ from each other
in the horizontal motor bracket and also the horizontal and vertical sensors. See
Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-1 Probe assembly

Probe
arm
Probe
Horizontal
movement
structure
Bracket
Vertical
movement
structure
4-2 4 Units and Modules

Figure 4-2 Differences among the three probe assemblies
(a)
(b)

R2 probe
Obstruction detection
sensor
Stop pin
Zero
Horizontalsensor
motor
bracket (R2)
(c)
(a) Sample probe assembly (b) R1 probe assembly (c) R2 probe assembly
4.1.3 Installation
Figure 4-3 Installation of three probe assemblies
4.2 Sample Disk Unit

4.2.1 Introduction
The sample disk assembly holds the sample tubes and carries them to specified
positions for sample aspiration.

a. Holding sample tubes: Sample containers (tube, microtube, etc) with
samples are placed on the sample disk, and then the sampling structure
aspirates sample and dispenses them into reaction cuvette.
b. Timely feeding: The sample disk must carry specified sample tube to the
aspirate position for aspiration according to the predefined timing. The
sample disk is driven by the drive part.
c. Sample identification: The sample disk must be able to identify the samples
automatically. This function is achieved by the bar code reader system.

The sample disk unit consists of the sample disk, drive part, sample
compartment and bar code reader.
Figure 4-4 Sample disk assembly on the analyzer
Sample disk: The sample disk holds the samples and in conjunction with the
drive part carries them to the aspirate position. Driven by the drive part, the
sample disk rotates around its axis.
Drive part: The drive part drives the sample disk to carry samples timely to the
aspirate position. During operation, the motor drives the axis to rotate via the
synchronous belt.
Bar code reader: The bar code reader identifies the samples correctly by
scanning the bar code label on sample tubes.
Sample compartment: The sample compartment is used to shield the light

beam sent from the bar code reader and separate the sample disk from other
components.

4.2.3 Servicing
The location of the sample disk in the whole unit is shown in Figure 4-4.
4.2.3.1 Installing the Sample Disk Assembly

1. Structure and functions of sample disk assembly
See Figure 4-5.The sample disk assembly is compose of upper sample disk, lower
sample disk, tube rack, tube holder, handle and axis. Driven by the stepper motor
and synchronous belt, the sample disk rotates clockwise, carrying the sample tubes
to the aspirate position according to predefined timing. Then the sample probe
aspirates certain volume of sample and dispenses it into corresponding reaction
cuvette.

2. Installation
Figure 4-5 Structure of the sample disk assembly

Spring screw PF42
PF42-
42-M5-20
NA
Handle
F8
positioning
dowel
a. Set the sample disk components on the drive part from top to down, ensuring
the pins on the drive part are aligned correctly to the holes on upper sample
disk.
b. Tighten the spring screws on the upper sample disk.
4.2.3.2 Installing/Removing Sample Disk Drive Part
The sample disk drive part is illustrated in the figure below.
Figure 4-6 Structure of sample disk drive/motor assembly
1. Replacing motor
a. Unplug the motor cables.

b. Loosen the four M412 socket head screws that fix the motor on the mounting
plate.
c. Push the support plate and remove the synchronous belt from the smaller belt
wheel.
d. Remove the four M412 socket head screws that fix the motor, then remove
the motor and mounting plate.
e. Install the smaller belt wheel on a reliable motor and ensure the belt wheel is
installed at a height specified in Figure 4-7. (Add lock glue to the two M48
socket head screws. Torque: 1.2Nm)
f. Fix the motor to the shock pad using two M412 socket screws with plain
washer. (Torque: 2.0 Nm)
g. Install the motor mounting plate to the supporting rod using four M412 socket
screws with plain washer and spring washer. Please note not to tighten the
screws now.
h. Adjust the synchronous belt to the tension of 0.19-0.2Kgf.
i. Use a wrench to tighten the four M412 socket head screws with torque of
2.0Nm.
j. Connect the motor cable.
Figure 4-7 Installation requirements for sample disk drive assembly
2. Removing Sample Disk Drive Part
a. Remove the synchronous belt from the motor. See steps a-c in 1. Replacing
motor.
b. Unplug the cables from the home position sensor and disk coder.
c. Use a wrench to remove the three M38 socket head screws, and then
remove the coder sensor bracket from the base plate of the analyzer.
d. Use a wrench to remove the four M520 socket head screws from the base
plate, and then remove the sample disk bearing upwards. Remove the
components of the drive assembly according to Figure 4-6.
3. Installing sample disk bearing assembly

a. Use three M520 socket head screws with plain washer to fix the sample disk
bearing to the base plate of the analyzer. (Torque: 4.0Nm). Please note not to
touch the sensor.
b. Adjust the synchronous belt according to steps g-i in 1. Replacing motor.
c. Use three M38 socket head screws to fix the sensor to the base plate and
then connect the sensor cable.
d. Connect the motor cable.
Figure 4-8 Structure of the sensor assembly
4. Replacing sensor
a. Unplug the home position sensor cable (BA40-21-61760) and disk coder
sensor cable (BA40-21-61761).
b. Use a wrench to remove the three M38 socket head screws that fix the coder
sensor bracket to the base plate, and then remove the coder sensor bracket.
c. Replace the coder sensor.
d. Use three M38 socket head screws with plain/spring washers to fix the coder
sensor to the base plate of the analyzer.
e. Connect the sensor cable.
4.2.3.3 Installing/Removing Sample Bar Code Assembly (including

sample compartment)
The location of the sample bar code reader and compartment is shown in Figure
4-4.
1. Installing Sample Bar Code Assembly(including sample compartment)
a. Place two sponge cushions to two sides of the glass window. Please note not
to contaminate the glass window. Stick a sponge adjusting spacer to the dust

shield and ensure the spacer is aligned to the corresponding hole on the dust
shield.
b. Place the prepared glass window in the groove of the sample compartment
and secure it with the dust shield, then tighten them with four M38 cross pan
head screws.
c. Use two M38 cross pan head screws to fix the conductive brush to the
sample compartment.
d. Use two M416 socket head screws with plain/spring washers to fix the
sample compartment to the upper-front beam(see Figure 4-4), and connect the
conductive brush to the upper-front beam. Be sure to align the sample
compartment to the drive shaft and prevent the sponge spacer from shielding
the light entrance of the bar code reader.
Figure 4-9 Sample bar code assembly and sample compartment
e. Install the sample bar code assembly according to Figure 4-9. Use three
M516 socket head screws with plain/sponge washers to fix the sample bar
code assembly to the base plate (See Figure 4-4). Connect the bar code reader
cable and fix it to its bracket.
f. Fix the sample disk components to the drive part, and place the bar code
fixture on position 53 of the sample disk (See Figure 4-10).
g. Check the connection of all cables on the analyzer and then switch on the
power supply. The system resets mechanically. Then the sample bar code
reader emits light beams. Be sure not to stare into the light beams. Otherwise
your eyes may get hurt.
h. Adjust the sample bar code reader properly so that the light beam from it can
pass through the gap on the fixture. Use four M38 socket head screws to
secure the bar code reader to the two adjusted directions.
i. Install the front panel and front plate 1 successively, and then cap the sample
disk.
2. Removing Sample Bar Code Assembly

a. Remove the sample disk cover, and then remove the front plate 1 and front
panel.
b. Unplug the cable of the sample bar code reader.
Figure 4-10 Adjusting sample bar code reader
c. Loosen the three M516 socket head screws and then remove the sample bar
code assembly.
3. Replacing Sample Bar Code Reader
a. Remove the sample disk cover, and then remove the front plate 1 and front
panel.
b. Unplug the cable of the sample bar code reader and loosen the clip. Loosen
the two M38 socket head screws and then remove the sample bar code
reader.
c. Use two M38 socket head screws with plain/sponge washers to secure a
new sample bar code reader to the bracket.
d. Adjust the sample bar code reader according to steps e, h, g and f in 1.

Installing Sample Bar Code Assembly(including sample compartment) .Please
note not to shield the light entrance of bar code reader with the sponge spacer.
e. Install the front panel and front plate 1 successively, and then cap the sample
disk.

4.3 Reagent Disk Unit
4.3.1 Introduction
1. The reagent disk unit is capable of refrigerating and keeping the reagents at
2-10 in 24 hours a day, so that the reagents are always steady and will not
volatile.
2. The reagent disk is driven by the drive module and rotates clockwise or
counterclockwise, carrying each reagent bottle to the aspirate position.
3. A reagent bar code reader is provided to input reagent information

automatically.

Table 4-1 Components of reagent disk unit
Name Functions Operation
Reagent disk Holds reagent bottles and rotates Rotates clockwise
assembly clockwise or counterclockwise, or
carrying each reagent bottle to the counterclockwise
aspirate position for reagent
aspirating.
Reagent Provides refrigeration function and
refrigeration keeps the reagents in a
module low-temperature environment, so
that the reagents are always steady
and will not volatile.
Reagent disk Drives the reagent disk to rotate Rotates
drive module
Reagent bar Inputs reagent information Scans the bar
code assembly automatically code labels on
reagent bottles
The reagent disk unit consists of reagent disk module, reagent refrigeration module,
and reagent disk drive module and bar code assembly. See Figure 4-11.
The reagent disk module is used to hold reagent bottles and rotates clockwise or
counterclockwise, carrying each reagent bottle to the aspirate position for reagent
aspirating. The reagent disk module includes the handle, reagent bottles, bottle
holder and reagent disk base.
The reagent refrigeration module is used to provide refrigeration function and keep
the reagents in a low-temperature environment, so that the reagents are always
steady and will not volatile. The reagent refrigeration module is composed of
refrigeration compartment, heated layer, refrigerating plate, insulation layer, radiator,
mounting plate, adjusting plate and the upper/lower air ducts.
The drive module consists of motors, belt wheel, synchronous belt, coder, sensor,
bearing assembly fixed axis, bearing assembly shaft and sleeve.
A reagent bar code reader is provided to input reagent information automatically. The
reagent bar code assembly is composed of the bar code reader and the anti-fog
device.

Figure 4-11 Structure of reagent disk unit
The system employs semiconductor refrigeration, which is cool wind plus air duct.
The refrigeration compartment has inner diameter of 444mm and outer diameter of
484mm. The refrigeration board is 10mm thick. From the bottom of the compartment
protrudes four ridges(height: 6mm), which are attached to the refrigeration plates
closely. The radiator is fixed to the bottom of the heated layer via springs and
mounting plates, and secures the refrigerating plate, which is pressed to the
refrigeration ridges and controlled by a spring. Below the heated layer embeds
screws to fix the mounting plates, isolating the refrigeration board from the outside.
There are two special air ducts located on two sides of the base plate to reject heat.
The Microscan MS-3 LASER reader (single-line, low density and lateral) is employed
on the system in view of its bar code type, density, depth of field and functions
comparing with all bar code readers in China and foreign countries.

Figure 4-12 Structure of bar code reader
4.3.3 Servicing the Reagent Disk Unit

The following figure shows the reagent disk unit on the analyzer.
Figure 4-13 Reagent disk unit on the analyzer

Figure 4-14 Exploded view of reagent disk unit
Installation of modules:
The reagent disk module includes the handle, reagent bottles, bottle holder and
reagent disk base. See Figure 4-14.
Installation procedure:
1. Use two M412 cross pan head screws to fix the two handles to the reagent
disk bracket.
2. Use four M48 cross pan head screws to fix the reagent disk bracket to the
base.
3. Place the 40 bottle holders on the reagent disk base.
Precautions:
See the figure below. The reagent disk base should be installed with the un-grooved
side upwards.

Figure 4-15 Structure of reagent disk module
The reagent refrigeration module is composed of refrigeration compartment, heated

layer, refrigerating plate, insulation layer, radiator, mounting plate, adjusting plate,
insulate sponge, radiator and the upper/lower air ducts.
1. Put the reagent compartment upside down. Fix the rubber cushion and
condensation tubing connector with four M312 cross pan head screws; apply
water-proof glue in the circumference of the refrigeration connector; remove the nut
and spring washer from the temperature sensor connector and use a transparent
rubber washer instead; use the reagent compartment thermistor fixture (BA40-J09)
to guide through the sensor and tighten it, then apply some water-proof glue in the
circumference of the sensor.
2. Apply conducting gels (0.1-0.2mm in thickness) to the surface of the 4 bosses at

the bottom of the refrigerating compartment. Put two insulated sponges inside the
compartment. Put the refrigeration plate with the side with characters facing
downward on the bosses. Gently press it until secure. Guide the line out through the
outlet. Apply a piece of heat film on to side without characters of the refrigeration
plate.
3. Put the two radiators into the compartment. And put 4 rectangular spinal springs
SWF22-25 into its holes. Put four radiator retaining nuts (add some nut gel) through
the rectangular spinal springs and fix them onto the refrigeration compartment.
Finally, apply some water-proof glue in the circumferences of the two joints.
4. Use 5 M4X8 socket head screws with plain/spring washers to fix the compartment
fixing plate on to the bottle of the refrigeration compartment.
5. Adjust the refrigeration compartment. Fill the scanning window waterproof cushion
into the square groove around the refrigeration compartment.
6. When bar code scanner is installed, use four M3X10 cross and chamfer head nuts
to fix the defogging devices onto the side surface of the refrigeration compartment
and then use four M3X6 cross and pan head nuts to fix the dust screen onto the

fixing plate; when bar code scanner is not installed, use four M3X12 cross and pan
head nuts to fix the reagent disk cover assembly onto the refrigeration compartment.
7. Put the reagent refrigeration compartment onto the air duct and adjust the position
with fixture. Use 6 M4X8 socket head screws with with plain/spring washers to fix it
onto the air duct. Install the seal circle into the groove of the compartment.
Precautions:
1. Proper screws should be used. Stainless screws are required.
2. The refrigeration plate should be installed in correct direction; otherwise it

cannot refrigerate as expected.
3. Do not reverse the reagent compartment until the gel has been applied for 2
hours, otherwise the gel might flow out.
4. Do not use the assembly until it has been 6 hours since the completion of
installation.
Figure 4-16 Structure of refrigeration module
The refrigeration module drives the reagent disk and consists of motors, belt wheel,
synchronous belt, coder, sensor, bearing assembly fixed axis, bearing assembly
shaft and sleeve.
1. Use the three-axis bearing fixture(BA30-J04) to press the bearing to
corresponding position on lower end of the bearing assembly fixed axis.
2. Hammer the A510 and A416 cylindrical pins to corresponding holes on

the bearing assembly, and integrate the bearing assembly shaft with the
fixed axis, then press 6004 bearing to the corresponding position on the
shaft.

3. Sleeve stop washer to the threaded part of the fixed axis, then screw M20
retaining nut to the tension degree that the bearing can rotate freely and the
stop washer can clip to the gap on the retaining nut.
4. Insert an A416 cylindrical pin to the bigger belt wheel; use six M38 cross
pan head screws to connect the coder and belt wheel, and then tighten the
coder to the bearing shaft with six M416 socket head screws with
plain/spring washer.
Precautions:
1. The bearing assembly should be installed correctly.
2. The end of cylindrical pin should be level to the lower end of the bearing
shaft.
3. The bearing shaft should not be blocked or moved up and down abnormally.
4. Screws should be installed properly, and the coder should be assembled

correctly and not deformed.
Figure 4-17 Structure of reagent disk drive module

A reagent bar code reader is provided to input reagent information automatically. The
reagent bar code assembly is composed of the bar code reader and the anti-fog
device.
1. Use two M38 socket head screws with plain/spring washer to fix the small
bracket of reader to the large support. Be sure to guide the screws through
the middle holes.
2. Install the reader to the small bracket and secure it with two M38 socket
head screws with plain/spring washer.
Precautions:
1. Be sure not to contaminate the glass window of the reader. Otherwise the
scanning performance may be degraded.
2. The screws to secure the reader should not be tightened unless you have
adjusted the reader properly.
Figure 4-18 Structure of reagent bar code module
1. Place a rubber cushion in the groove of the anti-fog device mounting plate.
2. Place the anti-fog glass on the rubber cushion.
3. Use six M28 cross pan head screws(torque: 1.5-2.5kgf.cm) to fix the heat
board to the mounting plate with its grooved side upwards.
4. Place a heater in the groove of the heat board.
5. Coat little heat glue to the heater on the downward side of the

overheat-protection switch, and then use a M312 socket head screw to
press out the overheat-protection switch.
6. Stick a sponge spacer to the dust shield of the bar code reader.
Precautions:
1. The window on the rubber cushion should be level to that on the mounting
plate.
2. The glass must not be broken or contaminated.
3. The cables of heater and overheat-protection switch should be guided

properly for convenient connection.
4. The window on the sponge spacer should be level to that on the dust shield,
so that the light beams from the bar code reader can pass through
successfully.
Figure 4-19 Structure of anti-fog and heat module
4.4 Reaction Disk Unit
4.4.1 Introduction
The reaction disk assembly holds reaction cuvettes and rotates clockwise, carrying
the cuvettes to specified positions for sample/reagent dispensing and stirring, and
wash solution dispensing. Reagents and sample react with each other in reaction
cuvette. Also the reaction disk assembly provides a constant-temperature
environment for the reaction.
The figure below shows the positions on the reaction disk. No.4 is for stirring R2,
No.14 is for dispensing sample, No.15 is for dispensing diluted sample, No.44 is for
dispensing R2, No.51 is for dispensing R1, No.64 is for stirring sample, No.65 is for
stirring diluted sample, and No.83-90 is for washing cuvettes.
For instructions of replacing reaction cuvettes, see 8.8.9Replacing Reaction Cuvette.

Figure 4-20 Working positions on reaction disk
Diluted sample mixing position (65#)

Sample mixing position
(64#)
Washing position
(83-90#)
Reaction Disk
R1 dispensing
position (51#)
R2 mixing
position
R2
dispensing
position
(44#) Sample dispensing
position(14#)
Diluted sample dispensing
position(15#)
The reaction disk unit consists of the reaction disk assembly, drive part, reaction
compartment assembly, coder sensor assembly and motor assembly. See Figure
4-21.
Figure 4-21 Structure of reaction disk unit

Reaction disk assembly: Used to hold reaction cuvettes, provide a
constant-temperature environment for reaction of reagent and sample in cuvettes,
and assist the photometric system to measure the absorbance change of reaction
liquid.
Drive part: Used to drive the reaction disk assembly to rotate and carry reaction
cuvettes to specified positions for sample/reagent dispensing and stirring, and wash
solution dispensing. During operation, the motor drives the axis to rotate via the
synchronous belt.
Motor assembly: Used to provide force which drives the reaction disk assembly to
rotate via the belt and two belt wheels.
Reaction compartment assembly: Used to provide a constant-temperature

environment for reaction of reagent and sample, and to deflect water.
Coder sensor assembly: Used to find the mechanical zero position and count the
valid edges of the coder.
4.4.3 Replacing Components and Parts

Figure 4-22 shows the reaction disk unit on the analyzer.
Figure 4-22 Reaction disk unit on the analyzer
See Figure 4-21 for the structure of the reaction disk assembly.
4.4.4 Installing Reaction Disk Drive Part

1) Install the bearing fixed axis of the reaction disk drive part(without belt) to the
location hole on the base plate. See Figure 4-23. Please note that the adjusting
hole on the fixed axis should face the back of the base plate. If not, use a
cross-head screwdriver to adjust the fixed axis via the adjusting hole.

Figure 4-23 Installing Reaction Disk Drive Part 1
2) Thread four M520 screws with spring washer through the bottom of the base
plate to fix the drive part on it. See Figure 4-25.

4.4.5 Installing Reaction Disk Motor Assembly

1. Install four stand bars on the base plate and tighten them with an adjustable
wrench, then sleeve the synchronous belt. See Figure 4-26.
Figure 4-26 Installing Reaction Disk Motor Assembly 1
2. Use two M48 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer to fix the shock
pad to the mounting plate.
3. Install the motor on the mounting plate and install the small belt wheel on the
motor axis. See Figure 4-27.

3. Use four M412 socket head screws with plain/spring washer to fix the
mounting plate to the stand bars. Please note not to tighten the screws right now
and not reverse the connector of the motor. See Figure 4-28.
4. Install the belt on the big and small belt wheels, adjust the tension of the belt
using the fixture, and then tighten the four M412 socket head screws.
4.4.6 Installing Coder Sensor Assembly

After installing the reaction disk drive part, use three M38 screws with pain/spring
washer to secure the coder sensor assembly to the base plate. Please note not to
tighten the screws right now until you have aligned the reaction disk properly via the
sensor.

Figure 4-29 Installing Coder Sensor Assembly
4.4.7 Installing Reaction Compartment Assembly

See Figure 4-30.
1) Install three stand bars on the base plate.
2) Use three M420 cross pan head screws to secure the reaction compartment to
the stand bars, and then tighten the three screws.
Precautions:
1) Before installing the reaction compartment, make sure you have installed the
reaction disk drive part, motor assembly and optical measurement assembly.
2) The three M420 cross pan head screws with plain washer should be used to
fix the reaction compartment to the stand bars.
Figure 4-30 Installing Reaction Compartment Assembly

4.4.8 Installing Reaction Disk Assembly
1. Hold the drive disk by its two arc grooves, which should be aligned to the guide
pin on the rotor sleeve, then install the reaction disk assembly to the rotor
sleeve.
2. Use three M516 socket head screws to fix the reaction disk assembly to the
rotor sleeve. See Figure 4-31.
3. Install the skylight cover to the drive plate with two retaining screws. See
Figure 4-32.
Figure 4-31 Installing Reaction Disk Assembly 1
Arc
groove
Guide pin
Figure 4-32 Installing Reaction Disk Assembly 2

4.5 Mixer Unit
4.5.1 Introduction
The mixer unit includes the sample mixer assembly and reagent mixer assembly.
Both mixer assemblies are equipped with a mixer, which is used to stir the liquid in
reaction cuvette.
Additionally, the mixers are also able to limit their mechanical motions or lock
themselves when power failure occurs.
Working positions of the two mixer assemblies: wash well reaction disk.

Due to different functions and movement timing, the two mixer assemblies differ from
each other in the arm structure, 12 shaft, sensor stop plate, limit structure,
horizontal motor bracket, and sensor.
The mixer assembly consists of the drive part and the mixer arm. See Figure 4-33.
The drive part supports the mixer arm and drives the arm to move vertically or
horizontally, so that the mixers move among different positions.
The drive part includes the horizontal movement structure and vertical movement
structure. Both structures have stepper motors, synchronous belt wheel and
synchronous belt. Integrated with a bracket, the two structures finally drive vertically
or horizontally the mixer arm via 12 shaft.
The mixer arm consists of a mixer, motor, enclosure, etc, which are integrated by the
arm base.
The main difference between the two mixer assemblies is the locations of the stop
collars on the horizontal motor brackets. See Figure 4-34.

Figure 4-33 Structure of mixer assembly
Mixer arm
Mixer Horizontal
movement
structure
Bracket
Vertical
movement
structure
Figure 4-34 Difference between two mixer assemblies
(a) (b)

(a) Sample mixer assembly (b) Regent mixer assembly
4.5.3 Installation
Figure 4-35 Installing two mixer assemblies
4.6 Photometric Unit
4.6.1 Introduction
Chemistry analyzer is a typical precision instrument which features in optics,
mechanics, electronics and logarithm. The spectrophotometer is one of the key
components of the instrument and determines directly the precision and accuracy of
measurement by the system.
The system employs the reversed optics of holographic concave flat-field gratings.
The holographic concave flat-field gratings are used for optical dispersion and
imaging. It can not only simplify the optical design to compact the optical structure,
but also eliminate the stray light. A combined light passing through the entrance slit
projects on the PDA(Photodiode Array) via the concave flat-field gratings. One or
multiple light-activated elements on different positions receive the monochromatic
light at certain wavelength. During operation, the photometric system controlled by
the computer receives the electric signals produced by the light-activated elements
of corresponding wavelength and then converts them into absorbance. In case the
spectrum is defined, the absorbance at multiple wavelengths can be calculated
quickly.

Figure 4-36 Block diagram of photometric unit
Measurement range: 0-3A

FWHM(full wave at half maximum): 8nm2nm
Wavelength accuracy: 2nm
Stray light: 0.8% at 340nm
Linearity range: 0-3.0A
Stability: By measuring the liquid with absorbance of 0.5A for continuous 10 min,
we conclude that the difference between the maximum and minimum
absorbance is no greater than 0.01A.
We employ the concave flat-field gratings for optics and the photodiode array to
receive light signals.
Reversed optics
Applied wavelength: 340nm, 380nm, 412nm, 450nm, 505nm, 546nm, 570nm,
605nm, 660nm, 700nm, 740nm and 800nm

The system applies the holographic concave flat-field gratings and PDA(Photodiode
Array) for photometric measurement. See the figure below. The front lens converges
the light beam sent from the tungsten-halogen lamp to the reaction cuvette via the
fiber bundle. The light beam passes through the reaction cuvette and then converges
at the entrance slit via the lens group 2. The gratings divide the light beam from the
entrance slit and then converge them to the slit array. Finally the PDA behind the slit
array converts the light signals into electric signals and then outputs them.

Figure 4-37 Structure of photometric unit
PDA Slit array Filter

Lens Reaction cuvette
Tungsten-halogen
lamp Lens Fiber bundle
Entrance slit Grating

s
The photometric unit is divided into two parts:
Light source assembly
Optical measurement assembly
4.6.2.1 Light source assembly
Figure 4-38 Structure of light source assembly
4.6.2.2 Optical measurement assembly
The optical measurement assembly is composed of the optical assembly and AD

housing. The optical measurement assembly converges the light beam from the fiber
bundle at the reaction cuvette and then projects the light on the concave gratings via
the entrance slit. Diffracted by the gratings, the spectrum from the entrance slit
images on the PDA. The photometric measurement is realized.

Figure 4-39 Optical measurement assembly
4.6.3 Adjustment of Photometer

4.6.3.1 Adjusting Photoelectric Waves and Collecting Position
Connecting an oscillograph:
Photoelectric collecting position can be determined by analog signals and AD start

signals that are collected using an oscillograph. Therefore, the probe of the
oscillograph should be connected to the specified signal test point.
Open the shielding box of AD collection board (See Chapter 6), connect two probes
of the oscillograph to the AD start signal(RC and GND) and analog signal of channel
1(VG1-VG12), then connect the earth terminal to the ground. (Only the earth
terminal of one probe should be connected to the ground.)The channels, wavelength
and test points are listed in the following table.
The voltage at the 12 wavelengths before AD conversion is tested using a multimeter.

The probes of the oscillograph should be connected as follows. TP12(AGND) is the
reference point.
Chan 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
nel
Wav 34 38 41 45 50 54 57 60 66 700 740 800
elen 0 0 2 0 5 6 0 5 0
gth
Test VG VG VG VG VG VG VG VG VG VG VG VG
Point 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Figure 4-40 AD collection board
Setting up the oscillograph:
The two probes of the oscillograph can be any of the 4 channels and now supposed
to be channel 1 and 2, which should be configured to make the oscillograph qualified
for photoelectric test.
The peak value of a normal signal is 5V. Both channel 1 and 2 should be adjusted to
2V, so that the photoelectric wave can be observed easily. Ensure the coupling mode
of the two channels is DC. Set up proper sampling interval to get waves easily. Set
the sampling mode to AUTO. See the figure below:

Figure 4-41 Photoelectric wave 1
Time 500ms
(500ms or 1s for
each scale on
DC Roll mode
2V for this channel,

2V for each scale
on Y-coordinate
Sampling
interval
100KS/s
4.6.3.2 Adjusting Lamp Brightness and Photoelectric Collecting

Position
1. Enter the Reaction Disk Unit screen of the system test and maintenance
software (See Chapter 9), select Reset Reaction Disk, and then turn on the lamp.
See the figure below.
2. Use the multimeter to check if the voltage at the light source assembly terminal is
within 11.8-12.0V(lamp brightness is approximately within 233-237). If not, select the
Parameter tab and then select Reaction Disk Unit in the Unit field, adjust the lamp
brightness until satisfied. (The greater the parameter, the higher the voltage) After
adjusting the parameters, turn off the lamp and then turn it on so that you can get
adjusted voltage.

Figure 4-42 Adjusting Light Source Brightness
3. Add 180l water to cuvettes No.55-60 to ensure flat waves.
4. First test the waves at 340nm, set up the Circles to 1 and (cuvette)Position to 1,
and then select the Rotate and Measure button.
Figure 4-43 Reaction disk rotates and measures
5. When the oscillograph displays the complete waves circularly, press STOP on the
oscillograph. The waves are frozen and stop going.
6. Find the waves for the five cuvettes in which water is dispensed. (In order to find
the waves easily, water should be dispensed to cuvettes No.55-60). Generally, the
five waves of the cuvettes with water are higher and flatter than those of other
cuvettes.
If the waves are flat, the yellow waves refer to AD start signals (In a bundle of
collected signals, the rightmost means 340nm and the leftmost means 800nm), and
the red waves refer to the photoelectric analog signals.

Check if the AD start signal at 340nm is in the middle of the photoelectric analog
signal (See the figure below). If yes, the photoelectric collecting position is correct.
If the AD start signal at 340nm is in the decreasing part of the photoelectric analog
signal instead of its middle (See the figure below), the photoelectric collecting
position is not correct and must be adjusted by moving the coder sensor of the
reaction disk left or right.

After the 340nm channel is adjusted, connect the probe 2 to VG12 of channel 12,
check the waves and collecting position of 800nm in the same way as 340nm. Make
sure that all AD start signals are in the flat part of the photoelectric analog signals.
Check if the waves of all channels are flat according to the step mentioned above. If
not, the pre-amplification board may go wrong and the optical assembly should be
replaced.
Figure 4-46 Abnormal waves
4.6.3.3 Adjusting Signal Gain of Photoelectric Unit

The purpose of adjusting signal gain is to adjust the water blank to a proper value
when the light is too strong.
Precautions for signal gain adjustment:
1. The lower limit of the light intensity alarm is calculated by the gain parameter of
340nm. The lower limit value is increased based on the gain increasement, which
causing the Weak light alarm cannot be released effectively by adjusting the gain.
(The calculated threshold value can be queried through Maintenance System
Maintenance Light Source Setup.)
2. The signal gain of the photoelectric unit has been configured properly before the
analyzer leaves the factory. When an alarm occurs indicating weak light, replace the
lamp instead of adjusting the signal gain. After replacing the lamp, check the new
lamp by executing Cuvette/Lamp Check on the Daily Maint. page of the operating
software.
Steps:
NOTE
Before testing the photoelectric gain, make sure that the lamp has
been on for at least 5 minutes; otherwise the lamp is not steady.

1 Select the Photoelectric Unit tab of the Test and Maintenance Software, check if
the AD values for water blank of cuvettes No.55-64 are greater than 63000.
2 If the AD value exceeds the range, select the Parameter tab and then select Main
Unit in the Unit field, select Inquire to view the gain parameters of each channel
(When the gain parameter increases, the corresponding AD value will decrease),
adjust the water blank AD value of each channel within 47000-49000.
4.6.4 Replacing Optical Assembly

If the optical assembly can no longer work as promised, perform the following
steps to replace it:
1. Remove the upper and front panels of the analyzer.
2. Remove the reaction disk.
3. Remove the upper plate of the AD housing; unplug the pre-amplification-AD

collection cable from the AD collection board, and unplug the parallel port
connector from the bottom of the AD housing assembly; remove the AD
housing assembly.
4. Remove the back cover; use a hex wrench to loosen the M3 retaining screw
that fixes the fiber bundle on the light source assembly; then unplug the fiber
bundle.
5. Loosen the three screws that fix the heat chamber; raise the heat chamber
with one hand and lift up the optical assembly with the other hand so that the
front lens assembly is disconnected from the heat chamber.
6. Install the new optical assembly following the above steps reversely.
Precautions:
1. Cap the fiber bundle terminal that is removed.
2. After removing the old optical assembly, place it in the installation package
together with the fiber bundle, and then bring the package back or send it to our
company for servicing.
4.7 Wash Unit
4.7.1 Introduction
In order to use the reaction cuvettes repeatedly, the system is integrated with the
wash unit, which is used to:
Wash reaction cuvettes;

Drain the waste liquid in reaction cuvettes;
To prime and empty the fluidic tubing;
To preheat wash solution and deionized water.

4.7.2 Functions
A reaction cuvette containing analyzed liquid passes successively the washing
positions 1-8. The wash unit includes 8 aspirate probes (Pd1-Pd8) and 8 dispense
probes(Pc1-Pc8), which are respectively located above positions 1-8.During
washing process, the corresponding solenoid valve is turned on before the wash
probes lower down, and then the dispense probes dispense wash solution in
corresponding cuvettes while lowering down. During the dispensing process, the
dispense probes also act as the overflow probes. Then the corresponding solenoid
valve is turned on and the waste liquid is discharged into the high-/low-concentration
waste tanks.
The following figure shows the structure of the wash unit and the detailed procedure
for washing cuvettes.
Figure 4-47 Structure and work flow of wash unit
The cuvette washing process is introduced below.
1. When the cuvette containing analyzed liquid reaches position 1, the reaction
liquid is aspirated by Pd1, and then Pc1 dispenses wash solution to the cuvette.
2. In the next period, the cuvette is carried to position 2. Pd2 aspirates the wash
solution, and then Pc2 dispenses wash solution to the cuvette.
3. In the third period, the cuvette is carried to position 3. Pd3 aspirates the wash
solution, and then Pc3 dispenses deionized water to the cuvette.
4. In the fourth period, Pd4 aspirates the deionized water, and then Pc4 dispenses
deionized water in the cuvette.
5. In the fifth and sixth periods, step 4 is repeated. When Pc6 dispenses wash
solution in the sixth period, the reaction disk rotates, carrying the cuvette to the
lamp site for photometric measurement. Whether the cuvette is washed clean is
determined by the measuring result(water blank).
6. In the seventh period, Pd7 aspirates the deionized water. This operation is
repeated in the eighth period. Pd7 and Pd8 are equipped respectively with a
wipe block on their ends. A very small space exists between the inside cuvette
and the wipe block, therefore, the water drop on the cuvette wall can be wiped

so that the cuvette is dried.
7. The solenoid valve is turned on to drain the high-/low-concentration waste liquid.
4.7.3 Structure and Installation

General structure of the wash unit
The wash unit is composed of wash probes, wash probe driver and collecting
board. The wash probes are fixed on the wash probes driver via retaining srews.
The collecting board is fixed on the probe driver via 2 M4X12 socket head
screws.
Figure 4-1 General structure of the wash unit
Installation of wash unit driver assembly

Figure 4-2 Installation of wash unit driver assembly
4.8 ISE Unit(optional)

4.8.1 Introduction
The ISE module is optional for fully-automated chemistry analyzers and designed to
measure the concentration of K+, Na+, Cl- and in serum, plasma and diluted urine.
The volume of the serum or plasma sample is 70l and that of the diluted urine
sample is 140l. The dilution ratio of the urine sample is 1:10 (1 part of urine sample
and 9 parts of urine diluent).

The ISE unit consists of the ISE module, pump module and reagent module. See Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 Components of ISE module

Name Description
ISE module The ISE module includes five electrodes (Na+, K+, Cl- and
Reference). Samples are dispensed via the sample entry port
on top of the ISE module and then analyzed and measured.
Pump The pump module includes three peristaltic pumps, which are
module used to transfer reagents and waste liquid.
Reagent The reagent module includes calibrant A, calibrant B, waste
module tank and a chip that indicates reagent inventory. This module
provides reagents for sample analysis and stores the waste
liquid.
The following figures show the structure of ISE unit, ISE module, pump module and
reagent module.

Figure 4-48 Structure of ISE module
Figure 4-49 Structure of pump module

Figure 4-50 Reagent module

5 Hydropneumatic
System
5.1 Introduction
1. The fluidic system of system includes the sampling system and washing system.
2. The sampling system is equipped with three probes, two mixers and three
syringes. The sample syringe is 100l and the two reagent syringes are 500l.
3. The inside and outside of the three probes and the outside of the two mixers are
washed via pressure driving. The inside of the three probes are cleaned with
deionized water.
4. Wash well: Inner diameter of waste tubing is 0.5. There are five wash wells and
7 normal waste liquids, which include reagent refrigeration waste, reaction disk
overflow waste, etc.
5. The reaction cuvettes are washed in 8 phases: 1) Phase 1-2: Cuvette is washed
with wash solution; 2) Phase 3-6: Cuvette is washed with deionized water; 3)
Phase 7-8: Cuvette is dried and wiped. During washing process, the wash
solution and deionized water are dispensed into cuvettes by pressure, and the
waste liquids are removed and drained by vacuum.
6. Water supply: An external water supply module or water unit is provided to

supply water. Therefore, requirements of water pressure and flow are imposed
on the water supply device.
7. Waste: Plastic hollow tubing is employed to collect the waste liquid. The waste
tubing should be installed at certain height so that the waste liquid can be
drained by gravity. Waste drainage: Low-concentration waste is drained to the
sewer using the waste pump; while high-concentration waste is drained to an
5 Hydropneumatic System 5-1

external high-concentration waste bucket that is equipped with a liquid level
sensor.
8. High-concentration waste is produced during Phase 1-3 for cuvette washing.
9. Drive source: The reaction cuvettes are washed automatically by air pump
driving.
10. The reaction cuvettes are washed with wash solution A and B, which are diluted
automatically.
11. The system uses three types of compressed air: 25psig (for draining waste
liquid), 10psig (for supplying water and wash solution), and 5psig (for supplying
concentrated wash solution). The waste liquids are aspirated and drained by
vacuum within -50k--86kPa (15-25inHg).
12. Before washing cuvettes, the deionized water and diluted wash solution A/B are
preheated to 30-37.
13. A separate solenoid valve is provided to wash the outside and inside of three
probes and the outside of the two mixers.
14. Wash solution diluting is performed using a buffer. When the low-concentration
waste is used out, the liquid level sensor alarms. When the system receives the
alarm signals, it turns on successively the valve for driving concentrated wash
solution, valve for driving concentrated wash solution B and valve for controlling
deionized water. Then the wash solution is diluted according to the dilution ratio
that has been configured.
15. The wash unit is able to divides the wash solution. During washing, the
deionized water is preheated and divided into 4 parts and then dispensed into
reaction cuvettes.
16. The pneumatic module is located on lower right of the analyzer in the form of
drawer, which can be pulled out for 500mm.
5-2 5 Hydropneumatic System

5.2 Function Block Diagram
Figure 5-1 Fluidic system of system

5.3 Schematic Diagram of Fluidic System
Figure 5-2 Schematic Diagram of Fluidic System
112 SV 21
C42
111
110 SV 20
106 C40
W 107
105 109
104 C41
SV 13
C1 P r e h e a ti n g
m o d u le 108
SV18 C2
125 SV 10
113 114
124 D 203
C3 128
428
123 126 SV 07
C39 200 C5
115 122 127 C4

SV 06
415
W a te r 120
d is trib u IN OUT
tio n
SV 01 m o d u le
145
101 116
146 137 138 139 140 141 142 143
C o n c e n tra te d 144
C6
SV 16
W a te r in le t b a ll v a lv e 102 147 435
w a s h s o lu tio n 204
148 SV 17 D ilu te d w a s h 206
427 C36
reag en t bo x s o lu tio n 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 C7 100
149 201
c o n ta in e r 207
150
103 118
117
434 C38
426 SV 28 SV 09
5PSI 10PSI
IN OUT 425

C35
SV14 IN OUT 208 205

424 429
P r e ss u r e
d e t ection C8
SV08
b o ard W a te r C34 C o n c e n tra te d w a s h 209
ta n k s o lu tio n c o n ta in e r

430
312
25PSI C 31 416
318
C27 320
VACUUM 414 SV 15
C 37 C 26 319
432 433
413 202
313 C30
423 154 155 156
M u f f le r Safety valve 431 C 10 SV 04
164 Clog detection
C 23
153
159 163
C 12 High
418 C 11 SV 03 conc. Low conc.
316 412
190
158
157 Waste waste
C9
160 161 container container
193
165
152 SV 02
311 411 162
OUT IN 417 C32
C29 C45
C25
OUT IN 422
210
314 Precise regulating valve 151
Precise regulating valve R1 R2 S 212
10PS I 421
5P SI S R
315 Primary 419 Degasser mixing mixing
Primary C 33
pressure 420
215
SV11
vacuum 310 container
167 169 171 173 175
contain C 13 C 14 C15 C 16
C17 Reaction
170
er
166
disk
C 46 168 172 174
195
SV 22
182
C 20 SV23 SV 26 SV 24 SV25 183
C 43 SV12
196 C 18
181 184
C 21
185
410 C19
197
180 re a g e n t W aste
405
179 c o m p a rt o v e rflo w
178 211
177 C 44 m ent c o n ta in e r
302 176 188 187
404 186 213
M u f f l e rV a c u u m m u f f l e r C 28
198
403 SV 27
A ir 402
194
199
pum p 401
C 22
m o d u le Radiating copper pipe Pressure switch

W a s te c o lle c tin g tu b e P re s s u re c o lle c tin g tu b e
P rim a ry v a c u u m c o n ta in e r d ra in a g e p u m p
300 vacuum M condense 191
192 214
SV 19
189
400
301
216
Interface
Graphic signs I n l e t f i lt e r
P -6 D I w a te r
S t r a ig h t
c o n n e c to r m a n o m e te r P -3
R educed
C o n c e n tra ted
c o n n e c to r P -5
R e s tr i c t o r
w a s h s o lu ti o n W a te r
r in g P -4 B A 4 0 -3 0 -6 1 3 4 6 s u p p ly
F il te r
W ash
D il u t e d w a s h d ra in a g e m o d u le B A 4 0 -3 0 -
so lu tio n
w e ll Optional H ig h c o n c . w a s te 6 1 6 9 7 w a te r
T w o -w a y S V O u t le t s u p p ly m o d u le
Syphon
F lo ate r W a ste
C heck tu b e optional
v a lv e T h re e w a y
SV W a t e r s u p p ly d e v i c e

5.4 Connectors
Table 5-1 Fluidic connectors
No. ID Serial Number Model
1 C1 M6Q-030063--- Connector.straigh through,Classic,1/8"ID,PP
2 C2 M6Q-030043--- Connector.Y,200Barb,1/8"ID,PP
6 C6 M6Q-030042--- Connector.Straight,Classic1/8"&1/16"ID,PP
Connector.tubing to tubing Y
M6Q-030024---
8 C8 MODEL3140-06-00
M6Q-030024---
9 C9 MODEL3140-06-00
Connector.tubing to tubing Right angle
M6Q-030059---
10 C10 3106-06-00
M6Q-030059---
11 C11 3106-06-00
M6Q-030059---
13 C13 3106-06-00
M6Q-030059---
14 C14 3106-06-00
M6Q-030059---
15 C15 3106-06-00
M6Q-030059---
16 C16 3106-06-00
M6Q-030059---
17 C17 3106-06-00
18 C18 M6Q-030096--- Connector.Y,600Barbs,1/2"ID,PP
19 C19 M6Q-030096--- Connector.Y,600Barbs,1/2"ID,PP
M6Q-030068---
20 C20 Connector3106-04-06
Connector.T MODEL Three
M6Q-030064---
23 C23 way ,6OD,3104-06-00
M6Q-030024---
24 C25 MODEL3140-06-00
25 C27 M6Q-030064--- Connector. T MODEL Three

way,6OD,3104-06-00
Connector. tubing to tubing Y MODEL

M6Q-030024---
26 C28 3140-06-00
Connector. T MODEL Three

M6Q-030064---
27 C29 way,6OD,3104-06-00

28 C30 M6Q-030064---
way ,6OD,3104-06-00

29 C31 M6Q-030064---
way ,6OD,3104-06-00

30 C32 M6Q-030064---
way ,6OD,3104-06-00
M6Q-030064---
31 C32 way ,6OD,3104-06-00
M6Q-030024---
32 C33 MODEL3140-06-00
M6Q-030024---
33 C34 MODEL3140-06-00
Connector. T MODEL Three

M6Q-030064---
34 C36 way,6OD,3104-06-00

35 C37 M6Q-030064---
way ,6OD,3104-06-00

36 C38 M6Q-030064---
way ,6OD,3104-06-00
Connector.Elbow,500Barb,1/2"ID,Natural
M6Q-030067---
41 C43 PP

Connector.Elbow,500Barb,1/2"ID,Natural
42 C44 M6Q-030067---
PP
Connector.straigh
43 C45
M6Q-030063--- through,Classic,1/8"ID,PP
Connector.straigh
M6Q-030063---
44 C46 through,Classic,1/8"ID,PP
Connector .straigh
M6Q-030063---
45 C47 through,Classic,1/8"ID,PP
5.5 Tubing
Table 5-2 Fluidic tubing
Tubhing
No. Serial number Model length
number
Tubing.Soft precision
M6G-020026--- PU(polyether)tubing 2130
1. 100 4mmX6mm Transparent
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 180
6. 105 AAC02007,Tygon

Tubhing
number
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 30
7. 106 LAAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 30
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 35
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 30
10. 109 LAAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 30
11. 110 LAAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 30
12. 111 L AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 35
13. 112 L AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 280
16. 115 AAC02007,Tygon
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 130
17. 116 AAC02007,Tygon
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 180
19. 118 AAC02007,Tygon
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 130
20. 119 AAC02007,Tygon

Tubhing
number
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 150
22. 123 AAC02007,Tygon
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 210
24. 125 AAC02007,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 50
25. 126 L AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 45
26. 127 L AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 40
27. 128 L AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 690
28. 129 L AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 700
29. 130 L AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 710
30. 131 L AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 720
31. 132 L AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 740
32. 133 L AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 750
33. 134 L AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 370
34. 135 L AAX02002,Tygon
35. 136 3001-10-07069 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H 370

Tubhing
number
L AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 380
36. 137 L AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 380
37. 138 L AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 370
38. 139 L AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 360
39. 140 L AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 360
40. 141 L AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 350
41. 142 L AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 360
42. 143 L AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H
3001-10-07069 370
43. 144 L AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
3001-10-07069 600
44. 145 AAC02007,Tygon
M90-000025--- PU(polyether)tubing 120

Tubhing
number
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 110
50. 151 AAC02007,Tygon
Tubing.PTFEID1.5mmXO
M6G-020049--- 110
54. 155 D2.5mmX100M
M6G-020049--- 240
55. 156 D2.5mmX100M
Tubing.PTFE,0.040"IDX0.
0040-10-32301 1050
56. 157 066"OD,250FT
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 80
59. 160 AAC02007,Tygon
M6G-020049--- 150
60. 161 D2.5mmX100M
M6G-020049--- 1280
61. 162 D2.5mmX100M

Tubhing
number
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 80
62. 163 AAC02007,Tygon
M6G-020049--- 110
63. 164 D2.5mmX100M
M6G-020049--- 1050
64. 165 D2.5mmX100M
M6G-020026--- 1500
73. 174
PU(polyether)tubing

Tubhing
number
4mmX6mm Transparent
Tubing.PVC KNITTED
M6G-020028--- TUBING 12mmX18mm 370
75. 176 SubTransparent
Tubing.PVC Knitted
M6G-020028--- tubing 12mmX18mm 370
76. 177 Subtransparent
Tubing.PVC Knitted
M6G-020028--- tubing 12mmX18mm 660
Tubing.PVC Knitted
M6G-020028--- tubing 12mmX18mm 420
Tubing.PVC Knitted
M6G-020028--- tubing 12mmX18mm 710
Tubing.PVC Knitted
M6G-020028--- tubing 12mmX18mm 140
Tubing.PVC Knitted
M6G-020028--- tubing 12mmX18mm 90
Tubing.PVC Knitted
M6G-020028--- tubing 12mmX18mm 260
Tubing.PVC Knitted
M6G-020028--- tubing 12mmX18mm 140
84. 185 M6G-020028--- Tubing.PVC Knitted 80

Tubhing
number
tubing 12mmX18mm
Subtransparent
Tubing.PVC Knitted
M6G-020028--- tubing 12mmX18mm 190
Tubing.PVC Knitted
M6G-020028--- tubing 12mmX18mm 300
Tubing.PVC Knitted
M6G-020028--- tubing 12mmX18mm 210
Tubing.PVC Knitted
M6G-020028--- tubing 12mmX18mm 185
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 230
90. 191 AAC02007,Tygon
Tubing.PU tubing
M6G-020002--- 4mmX2.5mm Transparent 90
94. 195 PU0425
95. 196 M6G-020026--- Tubing.Soft precision 80

Tubhing
number
PU(polyether)tubing
4mmX6mm Transparent
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 90
96. 197 AAC02007,Tygon
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M6G-020026--- 90
97. 198 AAC02007,Tygon
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M6G-020026--- 260
99. 200 AAC02007,Tygon
M6G-020026--- Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603 240

102. AAC02007,Tygon
203
103. 4mmX6mm Transparent

204
M6G-020026--- Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603 250

105. AAC02007,Tygon
206
M6G-020026--- Tubing.Soft precision 1370

106. 207 PU(polyether)tubing

Tubhing
number
4mmX6mm Transparent
Tubing. Soft precision

112. 4mmX6mm green

213
Tubing.PVC braided
M90-000028--- tube12mmX18mm 425
113. translucent
214
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-020025--- 100
114. 215 AAC02007,Tygon
4mmX6mm Transparent
115. 216
116. M90-000025--- 240

300 Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603

Tubhing
number
AAC02007,Tygon

117. 4mmX6mm yellow

301
Tubing.Soft precision PU
M6G-020025--- 460
118. 302 tubing 4mmX6mm yellow
M6G-020025--- 1600
M6G-020025--- 180
M6G-020025--- 380
M6G-020025--- 330
M6G-020026--- (polyether)tubing 220
123. 314 4mmX6mm transparent
M6G-020026--- 60
128. 320
(polyether)tubing

Tubhing
number
4mmX6mm transparent

129. 4mmX6mm red

400
M6G-020004--- Tubing.Soft nylon tubing 420

130. 6mmX4mm white NB0640
401
M6G-020023--- 90
131. 402 tubing 4mmX6mm red
M6G-020023--- 90
M6G-020023--- 120
M6G-020023--- 70
M6G-020023--- 1600
M6G-020023--- 90
M6G-020023--- 180
M6G-020023--- 280
M6G-020023--- 50
M6G-020023--- 400

Tubhing
number
M6G-020023--- 180
M6G-020023--- 80
M6G-020023--- 90
M6G-020023--- 90
M6G-020023--- 105
M6G-020023--- 160
M6G-020024--- Tubing.Soft precision PU 360

148. tubing 4mmX6mm blue
423

149. tubing 4mmX6mm blue
424
M6G-020024--- 130
150. 425 tubing 4mmX6mm blue
M6G-020024--- 50
M6G-020024--- 370
M6G-020024--- 230
M6G-020026--- 260
155. 430
(polyether)tubing

Tubhing
number
4mmX6mm transparent

156. tubing 4mmX6mm green
431

157. tubing 4mmX6mm green
432
M6G-020022--- 50
158. 433 tubing 4mmX6mm green
M6G-020022--- 290
159. 434 tubing 4mmX6mm green

Table 5-3 Auto wash tubing label
No. Tubing number in

Schematic Part number Model length
diagram
1 129 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-5
3001-10-0706
0-HL 690
9
AAX02002,Tygon
2 130 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-5
3001-10-0706
0-HL 7000
9
AAX02002,Tygon
3 131 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-5
3001-10-0706
0-HL 710
9
AAX02002,Tygon
4 132 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-5
3001-10-0706
0-HL 720
9
AAX02002,Tygon
5 133 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-5
3001-10-0706
0-HL 740
9
AAX02002,Tygon
6 134 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-5
3001-10-0706
0-HL 750
9
AAX02002,Tygon
7 135 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-5
3001-10-0706
0-HL 370
9
AAX02002,Tygon
8 136 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-5
3001-10-0706
0-HL 370
9
AAX02002,Tygon
9 137 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-5
3001-10-0706
0-HL 380
9
AAX02002,Tygon
10 138 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-5
3001-10-0706
0-HL 380
9
AAX02002,Tygon
11 139 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-5
3001-10-0706
0-HL 370
9
AAX02002,Tygon
12 140 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-5
3001-10-0706
0-HL 360
9
AAX02002,Tygon
13 141 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-5
3001-10-0706
0-HL 360
9
AAX02002,Tygon

14 142 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-5
3001-10-0706
0-HL 350
9
AAX02002,Tygon
15 143 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-5
3001-10-0706
0-HL 360
9
AAX02002,Tygon
16 144 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-5
3001-10-0706
0-HL 370
9
AAX02002,Tygon
5.6 Solenoid Valves

Table 5-4 Solenoid valves
Subsyste Qty. of
No. Position Function Medium Model
m pins
Deionized AB21-02-2-A-D
SV01 ML Water supply Auto wash 2NC
water C12V
Sampling Deionized LFVX0512100B
SV02 FL1 R1interior 2NC
system water A
SV03 FL2 R2 interior 2NC
system water A
SV04 FR S interior 2NC
system water A
Wash
SV06 RB1 1 phase wash Auto wash 2NC burkert 6606A
solution
Wash
solution
WTA-2K-N4G-1
SV08 BL1 H conc. Waste in Auto wash Waste 2NC
2
WTA-2K-N4G-1
SV09 L06 L conc. Waste in Auto wash Waste 2NC
2
Deionized
SV10 RB3 Auto wash 2NC burkert 6606A
3 phase wash water
WTA-2K-N4G-1
SV11 BL2 H conc. Waste out Auto wash Waste 2NC
2
WTA-2K-N4G-1
SV12 L05 L conc. Waste out Auto wash Waste 2NC
2
Deionized
SV13 RB4 Auto wash 2NC burkert 6606A
4 phase wash water
Auto
SV14 L08 Vacuum/10psi air 3 burkert 6128
dilution
SV15 L09 Vacuum /25psi Auto wash air 3 burkert 6128

Subsyste Qty. of
No. Position Function Medium Model
m pins
Auto dilution
concentrated Auto Wash WTA-2K-N4G-1
SV16 L04 2NC
Wash solution dilution solution 2
control
concentrated Auto Wash WTA-2K-N4G-1
SV17 L03 2NC
Wash solution in dilution solution 2
Auto
Auto Deionized WTA-2K-N4G-1
SV18 R02 dilutionDeionized 2NC
dilution water 2
water control
Primary vacuum Deionized WTA-2K-N4G-1
SV19 R09 Auto wash 2NC
container drainage water 2
Deionized
water
Deionized
water
Sampling Deionized WTA-2K-N4G-1
SV22 R03 R1exterior 2NC
system water 2
SV23 R04 R2exterior 2NC
system water 2
SV24 R05 S mix 2NC
system water 2
SV25 R06 R mix 2NC
system water 2
SV26 R07 S exterior 2NC
system water 2
Primary pressure
container Condense WTA-2K-N4G-1
SV27 R08 Auto wash 2NC
Condensed water d water 2
out
WTA-2K-N4G-1
SV28 L07 8 phaseWaste out Auto wash Waste 2NC
2
SV32(W
Primary vacuum
ASTE L10 Auto wash Waste / PML5161-NF30
container drainage
PUMP)
5.7 Layout of Hydropneumatic Drawer

Figure 5-3 Layout of valves, tanks and 11-way connector

25PSI 10PSI
Pressure sensing board
Vac 5PSI
Out
Out
H
sen
Fluid line Air line Air line OUT sen IN Fluid line
sor
sor
L
Low conc. sen
sor
Waste Diluted wash
container solution
Out
container
sen
sor
sen Water Pressure

Fluid line Air line Water in OUT out IN
sor detection
Air
in
H conc. Waste
Front
container Primary
vacuum
Right Left
container
Back
L
sen
sor
H
Fluid line IN sen OUT Air line Air in OUT IN Air out
sor
Wat Wat
er er
out out
Concentrated Primary
wash solution pressure
container container
H
sen
sor
Wa
Air line OUT ter IN Fluid line
out
L
Concentrated wash sen
solution reagent box sor
Water tank

Figure 5-4 Hydropneumatic drawer
Figure 5-5 Tanks in the hydropneumatic drawer
Concentrated
wash solution
container

Figure 5-6 Right view of hydropneumatic drawer
Figure 5-7 Left view of hydropneumatic drawer
Ball valve
Concentrated wash solution
High conc. waste container
Low conc. Waste container
Degasser

Figure 5-8Front view of Hydropneumatic drawer
Table 5-5 Pressure in standby status

Pressure in standby
25psi 10psi 5psi VACUUM
status
Visua
l 0.14 0.06 0.08 0.03 0.04
<-55KPa
0.21MPa MPa MPa
inspection
Inspe
ction by 255 PSIG 8~11 PSIG 51 PSIG <-8 PSIG
software
5.8 Structure of Air Pump Assembly

1. Schematic diagram of air pump assembly
Figure 5-9 Schematic diagram of air pump

2. Internal structure of air pump assembly
Figure 5-10 Air pump module
Figure 5-11 Air pump assembly 1
Muffler holder
Vacuum Filter.MEC2x6DF
Muffler.Fitersil
encer,F02,BS
PT1/4"
Pressure

3. Connection of air pump assembly
Figure 5-12 Air pump assembly 2
Silencers
Pressure Pump connection

protection switch board

5.9 Water Supply Module(optional)
The water supply module pressurizes the water source and enables the
deionized water to enter into the analyzer easily.
Figure 5-13 Schematic diagram of water supply module
As shown in the figure above, the water supply module consists of five
components: 1. power supply; 2. diaphragm pump; 3. pressure switch; 4. inlet
valve(inside analyzer); 5. water tank inside of analyzer.
The internal water tank pressurizes water and supplies it to the wash unit of the
analyzer. Moreover, the water tank possesses liquid level detection device to
detect the water in it. When the water in the water tank is run out, the detection
device sends a signal to turn on the inlet valve 4, and water is supplied. When
the water tank is refilled full, the detection device sends a signal to turn off the
inlet valve, and water supplying is stopped.
The pressure switch 3 is controlled by the pressure that it detects, which can be
configured as needed. Suppose the ON pressure is P1 and OFF pressure is
P2(P1<P2).When the pressure of the tubing that is connected to the pressure
switch is greater than or equal to P2, the pressure switch is OFF; otherwise the
pressure switch is ON. If the pressure is within P1 and P2, the pressure switch
keeps unchanged. Suppose P1<P<P2, when the pressure is equal to P2, the
pressure switch is OFF. If the pressure decreases from P2 to P, the pressure
switch keeps OFF until to P1. Similarly, if the pressure increases from P1 to P,
the pressure switch keeps ON until to P2.
The power supply 1, diaphragm pump 2 and pressure switch 3 are connected in
series and constitute a closed circuit. The diaphragm pump 2 is powered by
power supply 1 and controlled by the pressure switch 3.When the pressure
switch 3 is ON, the circuit is connected and the diaphragm pump 2 is started;
otherwise, the circuit is disconnected and the diaphragm pump 2 is stopped.

Figure 5-14 Connecting water supply module
Connecting the
analyzer via
filter
To sewer
Air vent inlet outlet
Water
supply Water supply
module
See the figure above. The external water tank contains purified deionized water,
which is passed via inlet tubing to inlet connector of the water supply module and
then to the analyzer via outlet after being pressurized.
The drainage module pressurizes and discharges the waste liquid from the
analyzer.
Figure 5-15 Skematic diagram of drainage module
The liquid floater sensor inside the waste buffer, upon the amount of waste in the
buffer, sends control signals to the PCB, which then turns on or off the waste
pump accordingly.

Figure 5-16 Connecting drainage module
5.10 Key Components

1. Safety valve
Figure 5-17 Safety valve to prevent overflow
Location: Air pump assembly
Function: Prevent pressure from going up. Overflow will be stopped in case of
great pressure.

2. Pressure regulating valve
Figure 5-18 Pressure regulating valve
Location: Hydropneumatic drawer assembly.
Function: Adjust pressure to specified range. Switch between 5psi and 10psi.

3. Solenoid valve
Figure 5-19 Solenoid valve
Location: Hydropneumatic drawer assembly, etc
Function: Turn on/off all fluidic or air tubing connected to the valve according to
received electric signals.
4. Check valve
Figure 5-20 Check valves
Location: All fluidic or air tubing.
Function: Enable the flow unidirectionally and prevent the liquid or air in the
tubing from flowing back.
NOTE
Do not confuse the check valve with a filter.

Figure 5-21 Filter
5. Pressure switch
Figure 5-22 Pressure switch
Location: Air pump assembly and water supply pressure module
Function: Adjust the pressure range for output.
6. Liquid level floater switch
Figure 5-23 Liquid level floater sensor
Location: Containers that need liquid level detection.

Function: A spring switch is set in the closed plastic tube, and an O-ring magnet
inside the floater. When the floater moves up and down, the magnet inside it will
magnetize and turn on/off the spring switch, thus detecting the liquid level.
7. Dryer assembly
Figure 5-24 Dryer assembly

Oil
Air drying device Mist oil seperator Air filter
seperator
Air filter can drain the liquid automatically; the liquid in oil mist separator and mist
separator must be drained manually by following the steps below:
1) Make sure the analyzer is standby or powered off and the pressure is released
completely/
2) Pull out the drawer; place a small container under the oil mist separator as shown
in the figure below. Loosen the black knob at the bottom of the oil mist separator.
3) When the liquid in the oil separator is drained completely, tighten the black knob.
4) Follow the same steps to drain the mist separator

Note
When the liquid is drained, the knob must be tightened to keep the
air tightness of the assembly, otherwise the pressure of the analyze
may become abnormal.
Location: Hydropneumatic drawer assembly.
Function: Remove the water or oil mist in pressure or vacuum air.

6 Hardware
6.1 Overview
This chapter describes the function of circuit boards in the system.
6.2 Safety Precautions

Dont touch the circuit boards by hand or others, when the analyzer is running.
If you need to detach the circuit boards, you must first cut off the power of the
analyzer. Please wear gloves to protect the circuit boards from ESD
(electrostatic discharge) or release the charge first before detaching the circuit
boards.
6.3 Circuit boards

The following table lists the number and the function description of the circuit
boards.
Table 6-1 Circuit boards of system

PCBA(PCB) Function Number
in
Figure
6-1
Main board As the main control part of the #2
system, the main board
BA40-30-61356
communicates with PC through
(BA40-20-61355) serial port RS232 and transmits
data and commands; also it
6 Hardware 6-1
in
Figure
6-1
transmits data and commands to
other sub-units(ISE, etc) through
extended serial ports; This unit can
control the AD conversion board to
adjust the numerical control resistor
and collect the photoelectric data.
The main board provides a
BDM(Background Debug Model)
interface for debugging software,
and a serial port to update its
application software.
Communication board The communication board #11
connects the main board to the PC
BA40-30-61377
directly. It provides special
(BA40-20-61376) interfaces for connection with the
main board and with the computer.
The first type includes the serial
port, network interface, USB port;
and the latter type includes the
standard DB9 serial port, RJ45
network interface and the standard
USB port.
Note: Only the serial ports are now
occupied on the system, and others
are reserved.
Reaction disk temperature This board collects the temperature #10
control board sensor signals from the reaction
disk and converts them into digital
BA40-30-61375
signals. This board provides an
(BA40-20-61374) SPI(Serial Port Interface) and a
power supply interface for
connecting to the three-disk drive
board via a slip ring.
Note: The same PCB is applied for
collecting reaction disk temperature
and preheat temperature. However,
the two temperature collecting
boards differ from each other in the
BOM.
Wash solution preheat This board processes, collects and
temperature control board converts into digital signals the
temperature sensor signals of the
BA40-30-73102
three wash solution flows. This
(BA40-20-61374) board provides an SPI(Serial Port
Interface) and a power supply
interface for connecting to the
three-disk drive board.
Note: The same PCB is applied for
collecting reaction disk temperature
and preheat temperature. However,
6-2 6 Hardware
in
Figure
6-1
the two temperature collecting
boards differ from each other in the
BOM.
Pump and valve drive board This unit receives signal from the #6
three-disk drive board and the
BA40-30-61373
three-probes drive board and then
(BA40-20-61372) makes the pumps and valves act;
There are 5 level detection senses
connecting the three-disk drive
board through this board.
Reagent refrigeration board This unit is used to cool the #12
reagents, indicate the temperature
051-000052-00
and drive the fan and defog circuit.
(050-000042-00)
Level detection board This unit can test the reagents or #9
the samples level and detects
051-000360-00
obstructions occurring to the
050-000283-00 sample probe and reagent probes.
400ul reagent probe level This unit can test the reagents #9
detection board level for 400 ul reagent probe and
detects obstructions occurring 400
051-000361-00
ulreagent probes.
050-000283-00
Clot detection board By observing the pressure change #5
inside the sample probe, this board
051-000218-00
detects the clots in the sample
(050-000223-00)
probe.
AD conversion board This unit can modify the analog #7
signals from the pre-amp board
BA40-30-61365
and convert the analog signals into
(BA40-20-6136) digital signals. Also this board
provides an SPI(Serial Port
Interface) for connecting to the
main board.
Preamplification board This unit can converse the light #8
signals into electrical analog
BA40-30-61363
signals by the photoelectric diode.
(BA40-20-61362)
Three-probe drive board This unit can control and drive the #4
first reagent probe, the second
BA40-30-61361
reagent probe, the sample mixer
(BA40-20-61360) and the reagent mixer to act.
Pressure detection board This board detects the pressure of
the air tubing that is connected to
BA40-30-61447
the vacuum compression pump,
(BA40-20-61446) and provides a serial port for
communicating and transferring
pressure data.
6 Hardware 6-3
in
Figure
6-1
AC pump connection board This board acts as an adapter to
connect the AC pump and its fan to
BA40-30-61781
the power supply. The AC pump is
(BA40-20-61780) powered by alternating current and
connected to the power supply
assembly; and the fan is powered
by direct current and connected to
the reagent refrigeration board.
Drainage module control This board detects the signals
board indicating that the
low-concentration waste tank is full,
BA40-30-61498
and then turns on the waste pump
(BA40-20-61497) to discharge the waste, thus
avoiding waste overflow. Also this
board sends the waste full signals
to the computer, which then gives
alarms to remind the user to empty
the low-concentration waste time
immediately.
Inlet pump power supply This board turns on/off the inlet
board pump power according to the
pressure signals of the inlet tubing,
BA40-30-72955
so as to ensure safe pressure of
(BA40-20-72954) the inlet tubing.
Three-disk drive board This unit can control and drive the #1
three disks, wash unit, temperature
BA40-30-61359
control unit and other related
(BA40-20-61358) moving parts.
Power board This unit provides the power for the #3
whole machine.
12V board:
051-000509-00
(050-000386-00)
24V board:
051-000510-00
(050-000387-00)
Connection board:
051-000511-00
(050-000388-00)
6.4 Layout of the boards

Figure 6-1 shows the circuit boards on the analyzer.
6-4 6 Hardware
Figure 6-1 Layout of the circuit boards
6.5 Detaching and Assembling Circuit Boards

You must pull out all plugs (refer to 6.8Connection Diagram) first when you
detach the boards and then you get out the fixing screws on the boards.
6.6 Function of board

6.6.1 Control Framework
The system consists of the following three units: the analyzing unit(main unit),
operation unit(PC) and output unit(printer).
The analyzing unit(main unit) consists of the following units: the temperature
control system, the reaction system(include ISE), the photoelectric test system,
the sample and reagent delivery system, the mixing system and the auto clean
unit etc.
Figure 6-2 shows the control framework of the system.
communicating with the PC through the RS232 to send commands , reply data
and test results.
controlling the data acquired process of optical system .
controlling the moving units action and collecting the status signal.
controlling the temperature adjustment system and collecting temperature status
signal.
6 Hardware 6-5
Figure 6-2 Control framework of system
6.6.2 Main Board

Function of the main board:
transmitting the data and commands with PC through RS232.

communicating with the sub-units(include ISE), transmitting the data and
commands through the extended RS232.
adjusting the numeric adjustable resistor on the AD conversion board and
collecting the photoelectric data.
providing a BDM interface to debug software and update application software.
providing USB interface, spare.
Figure 6-3 shows the function framework of the main control board.
6-6 6 Hardware
Figure 6-3 Function of the main control board
BDM
Power supply PC
debug
BDM UART
I2C
RTC
DEVICE
USB
SPI
EEPROM
CPU
FEC
SDRAMC PHY
SDRAM
USB
PCI
USB Device
Host
Flex Bus
FLASH
AD conversion board
Three-disk drive board

FPGA
Three-probe drive board
Main board
ISE module
LED FUNCTION
D3 3.3V digital power indicatorsecondary power
D4 +12V analog power indicator
D16 5V digital power indicator
D17 -12V analog power indicator
6.6.3 Three-disk Drive Board

This circuit board can receive the commands from the main board, and decode
the orders to drive the moving parts of the three disks and the auto wash unit; it
also control the heater according the signal from the temperature senses. Main
function
All CPU on this board receive the orders from the main board through the RS232,
and decode it to act.
The CPU on board output signals to control the moving parts related with the
three disks.
6 Hardware 6-7
This unit can receive the signals from the moving parts senses, signal protected
from collision of the auto clean unit and other status signals.
This unit can control the heater of the reaction disk (solid heater directly), the
pre-warm wash water and it can test the temperature of this two parts and
the environment temperature too.
This unit can receive signals from the liquid level senses and response
according the signals.
Figure 6-4 shows the function framework of the three-disk drive board.
Figure 6-4 Three-disk-drive board

Note
When replacing the three-disk drive board of G version or above, please take
care to differentiate the new and old machine. For machines which have liquid
change conducted, the board can be replaced directly. Otherwise, the jumper cap
on the J15 terminal 4 and terminal 3 should be removed first.
LED FUNCTION
6-8 6 Hardware
D22 +24V driver power indicator
D30 5V analog power indicator
D31 wash water heater 1 working indicator. ON: the heater is on.
D34 Reaction disk heater 2 working indicator. ON: the heater is

on.

on.

on.
D38 High concentration waste bucket status. ON: the bucket is

full.
D39 Waste buffer container status. ON: the container is full.
D40 Inside washing wash solution container status. OFF: the

wash solution botter is empty.
6.6.4 Three-probe Drive Board

This unit can control the stepper motors, the DC motors and the valves related
with the probes and the mixers and response according with the signals from the
senses.
This unit can receive the orders from the main board through the RS232 and
transmit the test data to the main board.
This unit can control and drive the moving parts of the R1 probe, R2 probe, the
sample probe, the sample mixer, the reagent mixer, the valves, the syringes,
etc.
This unit can receive the position signals from the moving parts senses. and the
signal for protecting probes from collision in horizontal orientation
This unit can test the liquid level according the signal from the level detection
board and receive the signals for protecting the probes from collision too .
This unit can test the clot signal of the sample probe through the interface with
the clot detection board and read the pressure value too.
Figure 6-5 shows the function framework of the three-probe drive board.
6 Hardware 6-9
Figure 6-5 Three-probe drive board
LED FUNCTION
D5 24V driver power indicator
6.6.5 Pre-amp Board

The Pre-amp circuit board can converse the light signals into electrical analog
signals by the photoelectric diode array. There are 12 elements on the
photoelectric diode array who can converse the light signal into the current signal
in difference wavelengths and the Pre-amplifier turns the current signal to the
voltage signal and transmit this signal to the AD conversion board.
6.6.6 AD Conversion Board

This unit can modify the analog signals from the pre-amp board and convert the
analog signals into digital signals. The 12 elements on the photoelectric diode
array converse the monochromatic light signal into the voltage signal in the
difference wavelengths and the AD conversion board filters the signal and
6-10 6 Hardware
amplifies it anti-polarity, then this signal arrives the AD input after it passes the
selectable switch; then the AD samples the 12 signals in turn controlled by the
signal from the main control board and the AD result value are sent to the main
control board to deal with further. The AD conversion board also provides power
to the Pre-amp board.
Figure 6-6 shows the function framework of the AD conversion board.
Figure 6-6 AD conversion board
AD conversion board
12 photoelectric Gain Multi- Photoelectric
Pre-amp. signals AD data
regulating channel Main board
board Power collection Control
circuit selection signal
LED FUCNTION
6.6.7 Reagent Refrigeration Board

This board is independent compared with other circuit boards; the unit can control
the cooler chip on or off and then make the reagents cool; it can adjust the
temperature in the reagent carousel ; this unit can also drive the fan of the whole
system and reflect the fans signal to the three disks control-driver board; the detail
is:
controlling the refrigeration
controlling the indicating LED of the refrigeration
controlling the fans and defogging the code scans windows
Figure 6-7 shows the function framework of the reagent refrigeration board.
6 Hardware 6-11
Figure 6-7 Reagent refrigeration board
LED FUNCTION
D2 12V fan power indicator
D3 12V power indicator
D4 5V power indicator (secondary power)
D5 24V fan power indicator
D6 Temperature indicator, red. ON: higher than the

upper limit of refrigeration temperature range.
D7 Temperature indicator. ON: within the normal

range of refrigeration temperature.
D8 Temperature indicator, orange. ON: lower than the

upper limit of refrigeration temperature range.
D9 Regrigeration plate 2 working indicator. ON:

refrigeration plate is working.
D11 Regrigeration plate 1 working indicator. ON:

refrigeration plate is working.
6.6.8 Level Detection Board

There are three circuit boards for detecting the liquid level, two boards for reagent
level detection and one board for sample level detection; the function detail is:
The three level detection boards have the same construction and interface and
detect the reagent level and sample level individually with the high reliability,
especially the sample level detection.
6-12 6 Hardware
The circuit boards generate the level detection signal when the probes touch the
liquid level; the depth that the probes dip into the liquid is not more than
2mm.
This unit can protect the probe from collision vertical ; it generates signal which is
sent to the three probes control-driver board.
Figure 6-8 shows the function framework of the level detection board.
Figure 6-8 Level detection board function
LED FUNCTION
D2 Auto adjustment indicator, orange. ON: auto

adjustment is successful ( level detection is
enabled)
D5 Level indicator. ON: level is detected.
D6 Vertical collision indicator. ON: vertical collision

occurs.
6.6.9 Clot Detection Board

The clot detection board of the system main function:
This circuit board can draw a conclusion of possible clot by judgment the change of
the pressure value when the sample probe aspirates the sample and send this signal
to the three probes control-driver board.
This circuit board can draw a conclusion of convinced clot by judgment the change
of the pressure value when the sample probe aspirates the sample and send this
signal to the three probes control-driver board.
This circuit board can draw a conclusion of air aspiration by judgment the change of
the pressure value when the sample probe aspirates the sample and send this signal
to the three probes control-driver board.
This circuit board can judge the clot cleared accord the change of the pressure value
when the probe is washed inside and outside in the wash pot and send the indicated
signal to the three control-driver board.
Figure 6-9 shows the function framework of the clot detection board.
6 Hardware 6-13
Figure 6-9 Clot detection board
LED FUNCTION
D3 Clot indicator, red. ON: clot is detected.
D4 Empty sucking indicator. ON: empty sucking is detected.
D5 Possible clot indicator. ON: possible clot is detected.
D6 12V analog power indicator
6.6.10 Pump/Valve Drive Board

This circuit board receives signals from the three disks control-driver board and the
three probes control-driver board and then generates the pumps and valves control
signals; it can drive the out water pump(spare),36 valves(16 spare) ; there are 5 level
detection senses connecting the three disks control-driver board through this board.
Figure 6-10 shows the function framework of the pump and valve driver board.
Figure 6-10 Pump/valve drive board
LED FUNCTION
D1 three-disk dirver board 5V power indicator (used to drive

photo-coupler)
6-14 6 Hardware
D28 three-probe dirver board 5V power indicator (used to drive

photo-coupler)
6.6.11 Reaction Disk Temperature Control Board

The reaction disk temperature control board collects signals from the reaction
disk temperature sensor and then converts them into digital signals. This board
provides an SPI interface and a heater power interface, and is connected to the
three-disk driver board via a slip ring.
LED FUNCTION
NOTE
The same PCB is applied for the reaction disk temperature control
board and the preheat temperature control board. However, the two
temperature control boards differ from each other in the BOM.
6.6.12 Preheat Temperature Control Board

The preheat temperature control board processes and collects the signals from
the three wash solution temperature sensors, and them converts them into digital
signals. This board provides an SPI interface and a heater power interface, and
is connected to the three-disk drive board via a slip ring.
LED FUNCTION
6.6.13 Communication Board

The communication board connects directly the main control unit and the PC .It
connects the main board in the system and provides interface to connect PC outside;
the detail is:
providing the interfaces connecting the main control board: serial port,
Ethernet port, USB port
providing the port connecting the PC outside: DB9 serial port, RJ45 WEB
port, standard USB port
This circuit board is the relay station between the main control board and the
PC outside and it can protect and isolate the communication signal too.
6 Hardware 6-15
6.7 Power Supply Module
The power supply module consists of three circuit boards: 24V board, 12V board and
power connection board.
The 24V board transforms the AC power to the A24V, B24V and A12V(the lamp
source).
The 12V board transforms the AC power to the other 12V(B12V and C12V) and 5V
as the system needs.
The power connection board has the function of relaying the AC power, controlling
the vacuum pump power, transforming to -12V, controlling the C12V and output of
the other voltages.
The power supply module provides all power through the interfaces on the power
connection board, and the 24V board, the 12V board and the connection board use
the plug board to board to connect.
The whole power system is a integrity module. It can be shielded and isolated from
the heat efficiency.
The power supply module can be cooled by the fans.
6.7.1 Features of Power Supply Module

6.7.1.1 Input
Input AC voltage: 90-264VAC
Frequency: 50/603Hz
Input power: 2KVA
Max instantaneous current: <40A
6.7.1.2 AC Output Voltage: AC1

AC1 voltage: 90-264VAC
AC1 frequency: 50/603Hz
AC1 output power: 300VA
Control request: AC1 is controlled by the TTL signal from the system; AC1 is
available when the control signal is high; there is no output when the control
signal is low; the control signal of TTL can provide the current more than
10mA.
6.7.1.3 AC Output Voltage: AC2

AC2 voltage: 90-264VAC
AC2 frequency: 50/603Hz
AC2 output power: 50W
Control request: AC2 is controlled by the TTL signal from the system; AC2 is
available when the control signal is high; there is no output when the control
signal is low; the control signal of TTL can provide the current more than
10mA.
6-16 6 Hardware
6.7.1.4 DC Output: 5V for Circuit Board
Output current:8A
Output voltage: 4.85-5.25V
Output ripple noise: 100mVp-p
6.7.1.5 DC Output: A12V for Lamp

Output voltage5-12.5V
Control request: A12V is controlled by an analog signal from the system; A12V is
available when the control signal is more than 1.5V; A12V changes linearly
from 5V-12.5V when the control signal changes linearly from 2-4VThe
analog control signal can provide current more than 5mA.A12V is not
available when there is no control signal; the control signal must rise
gradually when the power is on to make sure minimum the surf current.
6.7.1.6 DC Output: B12V for Refrigeration and Fans

Output current: 8A
Output ripple noise: <=140mVp-p
6.7.1.7 DC Output: C12V for Pump /Valve Board

Output current: 7A
6.7.1.8 DC Output: -12V - for AD Conversion

Output current: 0.8A
Output voltage: -11.4- -12.6V
6.7.1.9 DC Output: A24V for ISE Unit, Fans

Output current: 2.5A
Output voltage: 23.5-26V
6.7.1.10 DC Output: B24V for Heater, Motor, Pump, Wash Solution

Preheat
Output current:21A
Output voltage: 23.5-26V
6.7.2 Block Diagram

Figure 6-11 shows the framework of the power module.
6 Hardware 6-17
Figure 6-11 Framework of power supply module
6-18 6 Hardware
6.8 Connection Diagram
Figure 6-12 Connection diagram 1
6 Hardware 6-19
6-20 6 Hardware
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D Pre-am p board D
BA40-30-61363
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
J2 J3
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 J1 1 2 3
BA40-20-61486
Orange
Orange
Yellow
Yellow
Green
AGND White
BA40-20-61484
BA40-20-61485
SGND Black
Green
White
Gray
Black
2 AGND Black
Blue
Gray
Blue
Blue
Red
Red
Red
AGND
SGND
1 VDD
3 VSS
SIG1
SIG2
SIG3
SIG4
SIG5
SIG6
SIG1
SIG2
SIG3
SIG4
SIG5
SIG6
C C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 J1 1 2 3
J2 J3
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
AD conversion board
BA40-30-61365
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
P1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 B
B
10 DCP_CLK
18 AD_BUSY
11 DCP_DIN
19 AD_CLK
9 DCP_EN
6 AD_DIN
20 AD_RC
22 CH_A2
23 CH_A1
24 CH_A0
21 CH_A3
4 15GND
17 15GND
25 GND
13 GND
1 +15V
14 +15V
5 GND
16 VCC
8 GND
3 VCC
12 NC
15 -15V
2 -15V
7 NC
BA30-20-06552
J13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
A
M ain board BA40-30-61356 MINDRAY A
Pre-amp board AD conversion
TITLE :
board connecting diagram
File Bytes
DWG NO . A-BA40-30- REV 1.0
Date Time
Software & Rev : Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 3 OF 16 SIZE A 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6 Hardware 6-21
6-22 6 Hardware
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
M ain board
BA40-30-61356
J3
J8
2 4 6 8 10
1 3 5 7 9 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 PC_RESET
Red
6 PWFBOUT
2 PC_RXD
3 PC_TXD
BA40-20-61590
BA40-20-61589
5 GND
5 GND
C C
3 RX+
10 NC
2 TX-
1 TX+
1 NC
4 NC
6 NC
8 NC
9 NC
4 RX-
J3 J6
2 4 6 8 10
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 3 5 7 9
Comm unication board Ports: J1 ~ J6

BA40-30-61377 Ports spare : J1, J4
J2 J5
1 2 3 4 5 2 4 6 8
6 7 8 9 1 3 5 7
B B
7 PC_RESET
2 PC_RXD
3 PC_TXD
BA33-20-35270
5 GND
3 RX+
6 RX-
2 TX-
1 TX+
1 NC
4 NC
6 NC
8 NC
9 NC
7 NC
8 NC
4 NC
5 NC
RS232 W eb port
PC
A
MINDRAY
Com m unication board connecting
A
TITLE : diagram
File Bytes
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6 Hardware 6-23
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Sample level First reagent level Second reagent level

detection board detection board detection board
BA40-30-61369 BA40-30-61369 BA40-30-61369
J2 J2 J2
2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
black
black
red
red
3
BA40-21-61727
BA40-21-61728
BA40-20-61906
BA40-20-61907
3
2 RAM_V_PHO 2
2 RAM_V_PHO 2
2 RAM_V_PHO 2
black 1
black 1
black 1
red 4
red 4
BA40-21-61776
red 4
D
1 LEVEL green
1 LEVEL green
green
D
blue
blue
blue
1 LEVEL
2 GND
2 +12V
2 +12V
2 GND
1 +6V
2 +12V
1 +6V
1 GND
1 GND
1 GND
J29 1 2 J30 1 2 J21 1 2 J20 1 2 J22 1 2 J19 1 2 J23 1 2 J18 1 2
BA40-21-61706
6brown B- 4brown
1
6
B+ 3orange
First reagent arm 4 4orange
J4
up/down m otor
3 3yellow A- 2yellow
3
BA40-10-
1 1red A+ 1red
4
BA40-21-61778
BA40-21-61707
1
6 6brown B- 4brown 1 V PP Red
J24 J3
First reagent arm 4 4orange B+ 3orange 2 VEE
2
rotation m otor
J5
1 2 3 CLOG_YES 1 2
3
BA40-10- 3 3yellow A- 2yellow
4 CLOG_M AY
C 1 1red A+ 1red J1 ~ J32
Ports 3 4 3 4 C
4
5 NO_SAM
5 6 5 6
FPGA AS: J1 6 INT_CON
BA40-2 1-61710
7 8 7 8
1
6 6brown B- 4brown 7 INT_EN
FPGA JTAG : J2 9 10 8 G ND 9 10
2
First reagent syringe 4 4orange B+ 3orange
J6
motor 9 RES_CLG_I
BA40-30-61367
Three- probes drive board
Clot detection
3
Port spare: J25 10 RES_CLG_O
BA40-30-61361
board
4
1 1red A+ 1red
1
BA 40-21-61711
6 6brown B- 4brown 1 V PP Red
J17 J2
2
3orange 2 VEE
Second reagent arm 4 4orange B+ J7
up/down motor 3 RXD_CLG 1 2
3
1 2
4 TXD_CLG
3 4 3 4
4
1 1red A+ 1red 5 PSEN_CLG

5 6 5 6
6 RST_CLG
7 8
1
7 8 7 G ND
BA4 0-21-61713
6 6brown B- 4brown 8 GND
2
4 4orange B+ 3orange
J8
Second reagent arm

3
rotation motor BA40-21-61779 B

B 3 3yellow A- 2yellow
BA40-10-
4
1 1red A+ 1red
J9
4 3 2 1
J11 J12 J13 J14 J15 J16
J10 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
3orange
3orange
3orange
3orange
3orange
3orange
3orange
3orange
4brown
4brown
4brown
4brown
4brown
4brown
4brown
4brown
2yellow
2yellow
2yellow
2yellow
2yellow
2yellow
2yellow
2yellow
1red
1red
1red
1red
1red
1red
1red
1red
BA40-21-61718
BA40-21-61721
BA40-21-61724
BA40-21-61720
BA40-21-61723
BA40-21-61716
BA40-21-61715
BA40-21-61726
A+
A+
B+
B+
3 3yellow A-
3 3yellow A-
6 6brown B-
6brown B-
A+
A+
A+
A+
A+
A+
B+
4 4orange B+
4 4orange B+
B+
B+
B+
3 3yellow A-
3 3yellow A-
3 3yellow A-
3 3yellow A-
3 3yellow A-
3 3yellow A-
6brown B-
6brown B-
6 6brown B-
6 6brown B-
6brown B-
6 6brown B-
4 4orange
4 4orange
4orange
4 4orange
4 4orange
4 4orange
1 1red
1 1red
1 1red
1 1red
1 1red
1 1red
1 1red
1 1red
MINDRAY
6
6
6
4
6
A A
Three- probe drive board
Second reagent Sample probe arm Sample probe arm Sample syringe m otor Reagent mixer arm Reagent mixer arm Sample m ixer arm Sam ple mixer arm TITLE :
BA 40-10-
connecting diagram (1)
File Bytes syringe m otor up/down motor rotation motor up /down m otor rotation motor up/down motor rotation m otor
BA40-10- BA40-10- BA 40-10- BA40-10- BA40-10- BA40-10- BA40-10-
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-24 6 Hardware
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The m ain control board

BA40-30-61356
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34
J10 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33
D D
BA40-20-61641
RSTCTL_RP2
RSTCTL_RP1
RSTCTL_RM
RSTCTL_SM
RSTCTL_SP
NCONFIG
TXD_RP2
RXD_RP1
RXD_RP2
RXD_RM
TXD_RP1
RXD_SM
TXD_RM
TXD_SM
REV1_O
REV2_O
REV3_O
REV4_O
RXD_SP
TXD_SP
REV5_I
REV6_I
DCLK
ASDO
DATA
GND
GND
GND
GND
NCE
NCS
GND
GND
GND
33
34
29
31
12
20
21
23
24
25
27
28
32
10
11
22
26
13
30
14
16
17
18
1
2
4
5
8
9
19
6
15
3
7
BA40-21-61740
BA40-21-61729
1red VCC 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 1 VCC 1red
Sample probe a rm up/dow n + 4white SU _PH O 2 J27 2 RS2 _PHO 4white +
C 2black 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 Second reagent syringe sense
sense
- G ND 3 3 G ND 2black C
- BA 40-21-
BA 40-21-
E 3green G ND 4 4 G ND 3green E
1red VCC 5 2 1 5 VCC
+ 4white SR_PHO 6 R2_RAM _H_PHO + Second reagent probe arm
Sample probe rotation sense C 2black 4 3 6 C protected from collision sense
G ND 7 7 G ND
BA40-21- - 1 2 - (H )
E 3green G ND 8 6 5 8 G ND E BA40-21-
3 4
C 1red
+ 4white VCC 9 8 7 9 VCC
+ C
Sample syringe sense C 2black
SS_PHO 10 5 6 10 RU 1_PHO
C First reagent probe arm
- G ND 11 10 9 11 GND - up/dow n sense
BA 40-21-
E 3green G ND 12 7 8 12 GND E BA40-21-
12 11
1red VCC 13 9 10 13 VCC
Sam ple probe protected from + 4white 14 14 13 J28 +
C 2black
S_RA M _H_PH O 14 RR1_PH O
C
First reagent probe arm
collisio n sense (H ) G ND 15 16 15 11 12 15 GND rotation sense
- -
BA40-21- 3green G ND 16 16 GND BA 40-21-
18 17 13 14
E 1red E
+ 4white VCC 17 15 16 17 VCC
+
Second reagent probe arm C 2black RU 2_PH O 18 20 19 18 RS1_ PHO
C
up/down sense - G ND 19 Three- probe drive 17 18 19 GND -
First reagent syringe sense
E 3green 22 21
G ND 20 20 GND BA 40-21-
BA40-21- E
24 23
board 19 20
1red VCC 21 21 VCC
Second reagent probe arm + 4white RR2_PHO 22 26 25
BA40-30-61361 21 22 22 R1 _RA M _H_PH O
+ First reagent probe arm
up/down sense C 2black G ND 23 23 GND
C protected fro m collision sense
- J26 23 24 - (H)
BA40-21-
E 3green G ND 24 24 GND E BA 40-21-
NC 25 25 26
25 VCC
+ R ea gent m ixer arm
NC 26 27 28 26 RM U_PHO
C
up/dow n
27 GND sense
- BA 40-21-
29 30 28 GND E
1 6 31 32 29 VCC
30 RM R_PH O +
31 C R eagent m ixer arm rotation
2 7 33 34 GND - sense
B 32 GND E BA 40-21- B
+24V Yellow
+24V Yellow
GND Black
GND Black
10 GND Black
Red
-12V White
35 36
GND Black
GND Black
+12V Blue
3 8 J3
37 38 33 VCC +
4 9 34 SM U_PH O
C sa mple mixer arm up/do wn
BA40-21-61705 39 40 35 G ND sense
1 +5V
-
5 10 36 G ND E BA40-2 1-
2
3
4
9
5
6
7
8
J32 37 VCC
J31 38 SM R_PH O
+ Sam ple m ixer arm rotation
39 G ND
C sense
1 2 3 4 5 1 3 5 7 11 13 15 17 19
9 -
1 2 3 4 5 6 40 G ND E BA40-2 1-
J14
6 7 8 9 10 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
R1_VALUE_OUT Green
R2_VALUE_OUTGreen
Green
S_VALUE_OUT Green
RES_VALUE5 Green
RES_VALUE6 Green
RES_VALUE7 Green
RES_VALUE8 Green
RES_VALUE2 Green
RES_VALUE3 Green
RES_VALUE4 Green
RES_VALUE1 Green
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Red
Red
Power m odule
4 +12V
6 +12V
3 GND
5 GND
2 +12V
1 GND
BA40-30-61627
BA40-21-61679?
BA40-21-61747
RM_VALUE
SM_VALUE
GND
GND
+5V
GND
GND
GND
+5V
MINDRAY
1 black
1 black
1 black
red
red
red
11
10
20
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
9
8
1
5
6
2
2
Second reagent probe washing
Sample probe washing Inside

First reagent probe washing
A A
Three- probe drive board
J2 1 3 5 7 11 13 15 17 19
9 TITLE:
Inside valve
connecting diagram 2
Inside valve
BA40-21-
BA40-21-
BA40-21-
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
valve
File Bytes
Pum p/valve drive board DWG NO. A-BA40-30- REV 1.0
Date Time BA40-30-61373
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 7 OF 16 SIZE A3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6 Hardware 6-25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
BA40-21-61778
1 VPP Red
J24 2 VEE J3
BA40-20-
3 CLOG_YES 1
1 2 1 2 1 SIG+
4 CLOG_M AY 2 2 I+
3 4 3 4
5 NO_SAM 3 3 I-
C 5 6 5 6 J1 Pressure sensors C
6 INT_CON 4 SIG-
7 8 7 8 4 BA40-20-
7 INT_EN 5 RA-
9 10 8 GND 9 10 5
6 RA+
9 RES_CLG_I 6
Three- probe drive 10 RES _CLG_O
board
Clot detection
BA40-30-61361 board
1 VPP Red
BA40-30-61367
J17 2 VEE J2
1 2 3 RX D_CLG 1 2
4 TXD_CLG
3 4 3 4
5 PSEN_CLG
5 6 5 6
6 RST_CLG
7 8 7 GND 7 8
8 GND
BA40-21-61779
B B
A
MINDRAY A
TITLE : Clot detection board connecting

diagram
File Bytes
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-26 6 Hardware
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
Sam ple probe First reagent probe Second reagent probe

BA40-20- BA40-20- BA 40-20-
black
black
black
red
red
red
BA40-21-61775
BA40-21-61774 BA 40-21-61775
2 SIGN
2 SIGN
2 SIGN
1 GND
1 GND
1 GND
J1 1 2 J1 1 2 J1 1 2
Sam ple liquid level Ports J1 ~ J3 First reagent level Second reagent liquid
detection board detection board level detection board
C BA40-30-61369 BA40-30-61369 C
Port spare for debug J3 BA40-30-61369
J2 1 2 3 4 J2 1 2 3 4 J2 1 2 3 4
black 1
black 1
2 RAM_V_PHO blue 2
black 1
2 RAM_V_PHO blue 2
blue 2
3
3
green 3
red 4
red 4
red 4
green
1 LEVEL green
2 RAM_V_PHO
BA40-21-61776 BA40-20-61906 BA40-20-61907
1 LEVEL
1 LEVEL
2 +12V
2 +12V
2 +12V
1 GND
1 GND
1 GND
J21 1 2 J20 1 2 J22 1 2 J19 1 2 J23 1 2 J18 1 2
Three-probe drive
B
board B
BA40-30-61361
A
MINDRAY A
Level detection board connecting
TITLE :
diagram
File Bytes
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6 Hardware 6-27
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Sample disk bar code Reagent disk bar code Sam ple disk status LED
reader reader BA40-20-
BA40-20- BA40-20-
Red
Black
D
BA40-21-61771
Red
Red
D
BA40-21-61772
BA40-21-61773
10 shield
10 shield
5 GND
8 TRIG
5 GND
8 TRIG
2 RXD
2 RXD
1 LAMP
3 TXD
3 TXD
7 RTS
7 RTS
1 VCC
1 VCC
2 GND
6 CTS
6 CTS
9 NC
9 NC
4 NC
4 NC
BA40-21-61751 J11 J12 J17
6brown B- 4brown
1
6 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10
1 2
Reaction disk rotation 4 4orangeB+ 3orange 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9
J3
motor
3
BA 40-10-
BA40-20-61642
1 1red A+ 1red
4
BA40-21-61752 1 RXD_TC
6green B- 6green 2 TX D_TC
1
6 J24 J6
3 RSTCTL_TC
5blue +24V 5blue 4 GND
2
5
1 2 5 RXD_AW 1 2
Reaction disk rotation 4brown B+ 4brown
3
4 6 TXD_AW
3 4 3 4
J7
motor 3orange A- 3orange 7 RSTCTL_AW
C C
4
BA 40-10- 3 5 6 8 GND 5 6
2yellow +24V 2yellow Ports J1 ~ J27, J31 9 RXD_ST
5
2 7 8 10 TXD_ST 7 8
1red A+ 1red FPGA AS: J18 9 10 11 RSTCTL_ST 9 10
6
1 12 GND
BA40-30-61356
11 12 13 RXD_RT 11 12
FPGA JTAG : J19
Main board
BA40-2 1-61753 14 TXD_RT
Three-disk drive 13 14 13 14
1
6brown B- 4brown 15 RSTCTL_RT
6
board Ports spare: J13 ~ J16, J21, J25
15 16 16 GND 15 16
2
Reagent disk rotation 4 4orange B+ 3orange
17 18 17 RXD_REAC 17 18
J4
motor BA40-30-61359 18 TX D_REAC
2yellow
BA 40-10- 3 3yellow A- 3 19 20 19 RSTCTL_REAC 19 20
20 GND
1 1red 1red 21 22
4
A+ 21 FPGA_CONF_OE 21 22
23 24 22 REV5_I 23 24
BA40-2 1-61754
23 REV2_O
1
25 26 25 26
6 6brown B- 4brown 24 GND
27 28 25 SPI_CS 27 28
2
Sam ple disk rotation 4 4orange B+ 3orange 26 SPI_CLOCK

J5
29 30 27 SPI_DATA 29 30
motor
3
BA 40-10- 31 32 28 GND 31 32
4
1 1red A+ 1red 29 DCLK

33 34 30 NCONFIG 33 34
31 ASDO
B BA4 0-21-61755 B
32 DATA
33 NCS
6 6brown B- 4brown
1
J8 34 NCE
J1
W ash unit up/down 4 4orangeB+ 3orange
2
J22
motor
J6
3 3yellow A- 2yellow 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4
3
BA 40-10- 1 2 3
1 1red A+ 1red 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8
4
Yellow
BA40-20-61909
Black
Red
2 SIGN
1 GND
3 VCC
8 SIGN Yellow
-12V Brown
+24V Yellow
BA40-21-61748
1 +24V Yellow
6 SIGN Brown
1 shield Yellow
5 GND White
BA40-21-61749
4 SIGN Black
Blue
3 GND Blue
7 SIGN Red
GND Black
GND Black
10 GND Black
2 SIGN Black
GND Black
11 GND Black
12 GND Black
+24V Yellow
+12V White
+5V
1 2 3
MINDRAY
4
6
2
3
9
7
8
5
J19 A
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 Three-disk drive board
J15 J1
Reagent TITLE : connecting diagram 1
7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 refrigeration board
File Bytes BA40-30-61371
Power m odule DWG NO . A-BA40-30- REV 1.0
Date Time BA40-30-61627

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-28 6 Hardware
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Slip ring
BA40-20-
Heat_dish3 White-purple 18
Heat_dish2 White-green 16
Heat_dish1 White-orange14
PT3_D_I White-black 11
PT3_S_I White-brown12
+24V White-blue 17
+24V White-yellow 15
PT3_S_O White 10
14 GND White-red 13
PT1_D_O Black 1
PT1_S_O Brown 2
Red 3
PT1_S_I Orange 4
PT2_D_O Yellow 5
PT2_S_O Green 6
Blue 7
Purple 8
Gray 9
D D
BA40-21-61677
BA40-21-61676
To shield
PT3_D_O
PT1_D_I
PT2_D_I
PT2_S_I
NC
BA40-21-61757
10
11
12
BA40-21-61766
5
4
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
7
8
1
1 SIG N R ed 1 VC C 1red
2 SIG N 2 AW _PHO 4whiter +
C W ash unit up/down sensor
3 SIG N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 G ND 2black - BA 40-21-
J50 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 G ND 3green
4 SIG N J2 E
5 GN D 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
5 VC C 1red +
2 1 6 SIG N 2 1 6 AW _V_PHO 4whiter W ash unit collisio n sensor
J10 1 2 G ND 2black C (H )
4 3
7 SIG N
4 3 J23 7 -
8 G ND 3green BA 40-21-
8 SIG N E
6 5 9 SIG N 6 5 3 4
9 VC C 1red +
8 7
10 SIGN
8 7 5 6 10 R T_PHO 4whiter C Reagent disk hom e position
11 SIGN
7 8 11 G ND 2black - sensor
10 9 12 SIGN 10 9 12 G ND 3green E BA 40-21-
13 SIGN
12 11 9 10
12 11 14 SIG N 13 VC C 1red
C 11 12 14 R TC _PHO 4whiter + C
14 13 15 GN D 14 13 C Reagent disk coder senso r
16 SIG N 15 G ND 2black -
16 15 13 14 16 G ND 3green
B A40-21-
16 15 17 SIG N
18 SIG N 18 17 J26 15 16 1red E
18 17 17 VC C +
19 SIG N 17 18 18 ST_PHO 4whiter
20 19 20 19 19 2black C Sam ple disk hom e po sition
20 G ND G ND - sensor
19 20 20 G ND 3green E B A4 0-21-
Pump/valve drive
22 21 21 SIGN 22 21
BA40-30-61373
22 SIGN 21 22
24 23 24 23 21 VC C 1red
23 SIGN Three-disk drive board 23 24 22 STC _PHO 4whiter +
26 25 24 SIGN 26 25 23 2black C Sam ple disk coder sensor
board
G ND
25 G ND B A40-30-61359 25 26 24 G ND 3green
-
E
BA 40-21-
28 27 26 SIGN 28 27
27 SIGN
27 28 1red
30 29 30 29 25 VC C
+ Reaction disk hom e position
28 SIGN 29 30 26 RE AC _PH O 4whiter C
27 2black sensor
32 31 29 SIGN 32 31 G ND - B A4 0-21-
31 32 28 G ND 3green E
30 GND 34 33
34 33
31 VC C 33 34 29 VC C 1red
30 R EA CC _PH O 4whiter +
32 V CC C
33 VC C 31 G ND 2black -
R ea ction disk coder sensor
32 G ND 3green E
BA 40-21-
34 VC C
33 NC
34 NC
J22 1 V CC Red
J27
B B
2 SIG N
1 2 1 2 1 SEN_W 1+ 1red W ash solution tem p. sensor 1
3 SIG N
2 SEN _W 1- 2white BA 40-21-
4 SIG N 3 4 1 2
3 4 1red
5 SIG N 3 SEN_W 2+
W ash solution tem p. sensor 2
5 6 5 6 3 4 4 SEN _W 2- 2white
6 GND J9 J20 BA 40-21-
7 SIG N J31 5 6 5 SEN_W 3+ 1red
7 8 7 8
8 SIG N 6 SEN _W 3- 2white W ash solution tem p. sensor 3
9 10 9 SIG N 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 4 6 8 10 7 8 BA 40-21-
7 GN D to shield
10 SIGN 1 3 5 7 9 8 NC
7 8 9 10 11 12
BA40-21-61767
BA40-21-61770
1 CA _W _1 1red W ash solution heater 1

2 VC C 2white BA 40-21-
1 SING 1red Detergent level sense
1black 2 GN D 2black
3 VC C W ash solution heater switch 1
B A40-21-
4 VC C 2green B A40-21-
3 SING 1red W aste liquid buffer bottle level sense
BA40-21-61768 1red 4 GN D 2black B A4 0-21-
5
MINDRAY
CA _W _2
6 VC C 2white W ash solution heater 2 BA40-21-61769
BA 40-21- 5 SING 1red
6 GN D 2black concentrated bottle level sense
A 7 VC C 1black B A40-21- A
8 2green W ash solution heater switch 2
VC C T hree-disk drive board
B A40-21- 7
8
SING
GN D
1red Concentrated detergent B bottle level
2black
TITLE :
9 CA _W _3 1red
sense
B A4 0-21-
connecting diagram 2
File Bytes 2white
10 VC C W ash solution heater 3
B A40-21- 9
10
SING
GN D
1red Co ncentrated detergent A bottle DWG NO . A-B A40-30- REV 1.0
Date Time 2black level sense
11 VC C 1black B A40-21-
12 VC C 2green W ash solution heater switch 3
Software & Rev : Microsoft office Visio 2003
B A40-21-
SHEET 11 OF 16 SIZE A 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6 Hardware 6-29
6-30 6 Hardware
1 2 3 4 5 6 3-disk board7
7 8
BA40-20-61747 valve control

3-probe board wire
valve control BA40-20-61766
1 SV20 1
wire 2 SV17 2
2 SV05 2 3 SV18 3
3 SV22 3 4 SV06 4
J 31 5 SV23 5 5 GND 5
D 1 2 D
7 SV26 7 6 SV01 6 1 2
1 2 8 SV25 8 3 4 7 SV27 7
1 2 3 4
9 SV24 9 5 6 8 SV19 8
3-probe drive board

3 4 3 4 5 6
9 SV16 9
5 6 4,6,10,20 GND 7 8 10 GND 10
5 6 1 7 8
4,6,10,20 9 11 SV12 11 1
7 8 7 8 0 9
1 1,11 VCC 1,11 1 1 1 12 SV11 12 0
9 9 1 1
0 0 11 2
1 13 SV07 13
1 1 12 RES 12 1 1 J3 11 2
1
3 4 14 SV15 14
11 2 13 RES 13 11 2 1 1 3
1
14 RES 14
1 15 GND 15 1 41
3
1 4 3 15 16 16 SV13 16
1 15 RES 15 1 41 J2 15 16 J2
71 82 17 SV14 17
15 16 16 RES 16 15 16 18 SV21 18
71 82
71 82 17 RES 17 29 0
2
71 82
Pump/valve drive 2
19 PUMP 19 29 20
18 RES 18 12
3-disk drive board

9 0 9 0 2 20 GND 20 12 22
19 RES 19 board 2 4
3 2 21 SV09 21
20 RES 20 22 SV08 22 3
2 4
2
BA40-30-61373 25 26 23 SV10 23 25 26
7 38 24 SV28 24
2 7
25 GND 25 2 38
93 03
26 SV29 26 93 03
1
3 32
27 SV30 27 1
3 2
3
C 3 4 C
28 SV31 28 3 4
29 SV32 29
30 GND 30
J4 1 +12V 31-34 VCC 31-34
2 GND J1
Power supply borad
1 2 3 +12V
1 2
BA40-30-61627
4 GND 1 H_CON_W ASTE_POT

3 4 5 +12V 3 4 1
2 W ATER_TANK_EMPTY 2
5 6 6 GND 3 L_CON_W ASTE_POT
7 +12V 5 6
1 2 3 1
7 8 8 GND 7 8 4 DILUET_A_FULL 4 2
1 5 +5V
9 9 +24V 1 3 4 3 4
0 10 GND 9 6 5 GND
1 1 0
11 +24V 1 1 5 6 6 5 6
1 2 1 2 7 CON_A_FULL 7
12 +24V J5 7 8 7 8 J 27
8 DILUTE_B_FULL 8
1 1
9 9 W ATER_TANK_FULL 9 9
01 10 DILUET_A_EMPTY 01
1 1
11 10
MAIN_VAL_CON
1 2 1 2
1 1 12 ISE
11 _W ASTE 1 1
Pump /valve drive board and 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 4 13 CON_A_EMPTY
12 3 4
2 4 6 8
power supply board connecting 0 2
1 4
1 6
1 8
1 0
1 2
2 4
2 6
2 14 13 CON_B
J 11 1 3 5 7 9 14
cable BA 40 -20 - 61807 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 3-disk board liquid
B B
level sensor cable
BA40-20-61767
21
22
15
13
10
17
18
1
1
6
1
4
1 FLOAT
1 FLOAT
1 FLOAT
1 FLOAT
1 FLOAT
1 FLOAT
1 FLOAT
1 FLOAT
1 FLOAT
2 GND
2 GND
2 GND
2 GND
2 GND
2 GND
2 GND
2 GND
2 GND

Low conc. Waste container
Primary vacuum container

Diluted wash solution
Diluted wash solution

Water tank is empty
High conc.waste is full
container is empty
container is empty
Water tank is full
container is full
container is full
MINDRAY
is full
is full
A A
Pump /valve drive board wiring
TITLE : diagram 1
File : Bytes :
DW G NO . A -BA 40 -2 0 - REV A
Date : Time :
Software & Rev : Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 13 OF 19 SIZE A3

A3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6 Hardware 6-31
6-32 6 Hardware
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Heat sensitivity resistor Peltier cooler Peltier cooler Peltier cooler Peltier cooler
3001-21-07100 BA30-10-06633 BA30-10-06633 BA30-10-06633 BA30-10-06633
D D
2 black
2 black
2 black
1 red
2 black
1 red
1 red
2 black
1 red
1 red
BA40-20-61656
BA40-20-61648
BA40-20-61656
BA40-20-61656
BA40-20-61656
Control
Control
Control
VCC
Control
VCC
VCC
VCC
2 black
2 black
2 black
1 red
2 black
1 red
1 red
2 black
1 red
1 red
BA40-20-61908
BA40-20-61586 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
connection board
J7
BA40-30-61781
Vacuum pump
J1 J3 J4 J5 J6
1 black GND 1 black
1 24V Red 1 1
1 1 J7
2 FGND Black 2 red VCC 2 red
2 2 2
C 2 J17 Ports J1 ~ J21, P1, P2 C
J9 Yellow
3 12VFAN
3 3
Reserved ports
BA40-30-61627
Power module
4 SGND Green
4 4
Reagent refrigeration board J8, J9, J10, J11
1 12V Red 1 B A40-30-61371
1 J12, J13, J14
P1
2 12V Red 2
2 J22
Three-disk drive
BA40-30-61359
1 black GND 1 black
1 1
board
3 GND Black 1
1
P2 2 yellow SIGN 2 yellow
4 GND Black 2 J19 2 2
2
3 red VCC 3 red
3 3
BA40-20-61587 J18 J2 J15 J16 J20 J21
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
BA40-20-61909
B B
2 yellow
1 black
1 black
1 black
1 black
1 black
1 black
2 red
3 red
2 red
2 red
2 red
2 red
BA40-20-61652
BA40-20-61654
BA40-20-61654
BA40-20-61644
BA40-20-61646
BA40-20-61650
DATA
VCC
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
2 yellow
1 black
1 black
1 black
1 black
1 black
1 black
2 red
3 red
2 red
2 red
2 red
2 red
Cool fan Lamp fan PCB cooling fan PCB cooling fan Defog heater Defog temperature switch
BA 40-20- M 07-00062S--- 2100-20-08144 2100-20-08144 BA40- BA40-
A
MINDRAY A
R eagent refrigeration board
TITLE : connecting diagram
File Bytes
DWG NO . A-B A40-30- REV 1.0
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6 Hardware 6-33
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
BA40-21-61701
NC
1
J1
3 Blue Line 2 Blue
2 BA40-21-61704
1 W hite Line 3 W hite

3 1 1 Red VCC
Vacuum pum p (220V) J2 J6
4 Orange Not used 4 Orange
4 2 Black GND W aste pum p
2
5 Red Connected 5 Red 5

C C
J3
2 Black Connected 6 Black
6
BA40-21-61702
BA40-20-61910
Vacuum pump 1 Black GND
Vacuum pum p connection board
1
cooling fan J8 BA 40-30-61781 1 AC1
2 Red VCC
3100-20-49437 2 2
J13
1 5 1 5
BA40-30-61627
3 AC2
Power module
BA40-21-61703
2 6 4 2 6
1 Red VCC J5
Pressure 1 3 7 5 3 7
protection switch J4
2 Black GND
2 6 ACINN
4 8 4 8
7
B B
8 ACINN
BA40-20-61908
1 1 Black GND
1
J7 J7
2 Red VCC
2 2
Reagent
refrigeration board
BA40-30-61371
A
MINDRAY A
TITLE:
TITLE : V acuum pum p connection board
File
File Bytes
connecting diagram
DWG NO.
NO. A-B A40-30- REV 1.0
Date
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-34 6 Hardware
7 Replacement of Other
Components and Parts
7.1 Overview
Tools used for replacement:
Hex wrench
Cross-head screwdriver
Adjustable wrench
BA40-J18-1
Blade
Seal tape
7.2 Enclosure and Panel

Left panel
Figure 7-1 Left panel and latch hooks
7 Replacement of Other Components and Parts 7-1

Figure 7-2 Left panel and its installation site
Securing methods:
Latch hooks
Retaining screws
Right panel
Figure 7-3 Right panel and its latch hooks
7-2 7 Replacement of Other Components and Parts

Figure 7-4 Right panel and its installation site
Installation site
of right panel
Retaining screws
Securing methods:
Latch hooks
Retaining screws
Components inside the front doors
Figure 7-5 Front doors and their hinges

Figure 7-6 Front doors
Securing methods:
Hinges
Front panel
Figure 7-7 Front panel

Panel 2 Front panel Panel1 Panel 3
Securing methods:
Multiple retaining screws

Stop plates of left and right air vents
Figure 7-8 Left and right air vents
Rear panel
Figure 7-9 Rear panel of system
Securing methods:
Retaining screws.

7.3 Replacing Valves and Tanks
Vacuum tank
Figure 7-10 Vacuum container
Clean the vacuum tank cover and sealing ring; place the sealing ring in the groove of
the tank opening; use the fixture(BA40-J35-1) to tighten the tank cover.
Seal the vacuum tank properly; otherwise air leakage may occur.
Pressure tank
Figure 7-11 Pressure tank
Clean the pressure tank cover and sealing ring; place the sealing ring in the groove
of the tank opening; use the fixture(BA40-J35-1) to tighten the tank cover.

Seal the pressure tank properly; otherwise air leakage may occur.
Water tank
Figure 7-12 Water tank
Clean the water tank cover and sealing ring; place the sealing ring in the groove of
the tank opening; use the fixture(BA40-J35-1) to tighten the tank cover.
Seal the water tank properly; otherwise air leakage may occur.
Waste tank

Figure 7-13 Waste tank

NOTE:
When the washing of the waste tank is completed and you are about to
reassemble the it, please make sure the O-ring should be placed at the
right position on the mouth of the tank and be placed smoonthly to avoid
leakage after installation.
Diluted wash solution tank
Figure 7-14 Diluted wash solution tank
Clean the diluted wash solution tank cover and sealing ring; place the sealing ring in
the groove of the tank opening; use the fixture(BA40-J18-1) to tighten the tank cover.
Seal the diluted wash solution tank properly; otherwise air leakage may occur.
Valves on left of hydropneumatic drawer
Figure 7-15 Valves on left of Hydropneumatic drawer
Use four M3X12 cross pan head screws with washer to respectively fix the 6
solenoid valves 2 to the left bracket.
Use two M3X8 cross pan head screws with washer to respectively fix the 3
solenoid valves 3 to the right bracket.
Precautions:
The valves SV08/SV09/SV10/SV28 have their outlets located on the silk side of the
left bracket and their inlets on the silk side of the right bracket.

Use four M3X12 stainless steel cross pan screws to fix the KNF diaphragm pump
(with shock pad) on the pump bracket. Use cross-head screwdriver and three M3X6
cross pan screws to fix the pump assembly on to the left valve bracket.
Valves on right of hydropneumatic drawer
Figure 7-16 Valves on right of Hydropneumatic drawer
7.4 Installing Sample Syringe

The following figure shows the sample syringe.
Figure 7-17 Sample Syringe
Perform the following steps to install the sample syringe:
1. Use four M4x10 socket head screws with washer to fix the drive part to the
syringe bracket.
2. Screw the T-piece to the syringe manually until secure. Be sure to place a
plastic washer between the T-piece and the syringe.
3. Use retaining screws to fix the drive module and its bracket to the framework

of the analyzer.
4. Install the syringe on the V-bracket, ensuring the upper end of the V-bracket
reach the 11th scale on the syringe; then use two space bars and four
retaining screws to fix the syringe on the V-bracket.
5. Rotate the syringe motor and tighten the lower retaining screw of the plunger
while the plunger moves downwards.
Precautions:
1. The T-piece of the sample syringe must be tightened.
2. While fixing the retaining screws, be sure to tighten them alternately with
equilibrium force.
3. The sample syringe should be of 100l.
7.5 Installing Reagent Syringe

The following figure shows the reagent syringe.
Figure 7-18 Installing Reagent Syringe
Perform the following steps to install the reagent syringe:
1. Use four M4x10 socket head screws with washer to fix the drive part to the
syringe bracket.
2. Screw the T-piece to the syringe manually until secure. Be sure to place a
plastic washer between the T-piece and the syringe.
3. Use retaining screws to fix the drive module and its bracket to the framework
of the analyzer.
4. Install the syringe on the V-bracket, ensuring the upper end of the V-bracket
reach the 7.5th scale on the syringe; then use two space bars and four
retaining screws to fix the syringe on the V-bracket.

5. Rotate the syringe motor and tighten the lower retaining screw of the plunger
while the plunger moves downwards.
Precautions:
1. The T-piece of reagent syringe differs from that of sample syringe in the
upper threaded hole, which is located on the top of the T-piece. Tighten
properly the T-piece to the reagent syringe and ensure that the threads on
the syringe are not damaged.
2. While fixing the retaining screws, be sure to tighten them alternately with
equilibrium force.
3. The reagent syringe should be of 500l.
7.6 Installing Power Supply Assembly

Power supply housing
Figure 7-19 Power supply housing
Inside view of power supply housing
Figure 7-20 Inside view of power supply housing
Radiating fans and shield

Figure 7-21 Radiating fans and shield

8 Service and
Maintenance
To ensure reliability, good performance and service life of the system, regular
maintenance is required. Be sure to follow the instructions given below to maintain
the system. Even youre only an operator, its very important for you to learn this
chapter. Your thorough understanding will help you obtaining the best performance of
the system.
WARNING
Do not perform any maintenance procedures that are not described
in this chapter.
Do not touch the components other than the ones specified in this
chapter.
Performing unauthorized maintenance procedures may damage your
system, void any applicable warranty or service contract and even
cause personal injury.
After performing any maintenance actions or procedures, ensure that
the system runs normally.
Do not spill water or reagent on mechanical or electrical components
of the system.
BIOHAZARD
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles during
maintaining process.
8 Service and Maintenance 8-1

8.1 Preparation
The following tools, wash solution and ethanol may facilitate your maintenance.
8.1.1 Tools
Hex wrenches (M1.5, M3 and M4)
Cross-headed screwdrivers (large, medium and small)
Needle tube
Tweezers
Clean gauze
scissors
8.1.2 Wash Solution

Acid: 0.1mol/l hydrochloric acid
Alkaline: javel water with 0.5% active chlorine.
WARNING
Poisonous gas will be produced if acid wash solution is mixed with
alkaline wash solution. Do not mix the acid wash solution with the
alkaline one.
CAUTION
Mindray has specified the following enhanced wash solutions:
Acid wash solution: 0.1mol/l hydrochloric acid;
Alkaline wash solution: javel water with 0.5% active chlorine..
Be sure to use the enhanced wash solution specified by Mindray.
Otherwise, proper result may not be obtained.
Mindray recommends the acid and alkaline wash solutions be used
alternately. For instance, if the acid wash solution is used at current
startup, the alkaline one should be used at next startup.
8.1.3 Others
Water-free ethanol
Disinfectant
8.2 Daily Maintenance

8.2.1 Checking Sample/Reagent Syringes
Follow this procedure to check the sample and reagent syringes. The purpose of this
check is to ensure the syringes do not leak.
1 Place the Power to OFF.

2 Open the front doors of the analyzer. You will see the two reagent
syringes on the left and one sample syringe on the right.
8-2 8 Service and Maintenance

3 Check whether the T-piece leaks and air bubbles exist in the syringe.
If not, proceed to the next step.
If yes, find the reasons and replace the tubing, T-piece and connector if
necessary.
4 Check whether the plunger guide cap leaks.
If not, proceed to the next step.
If yes, replace the cap.
5 Close the front doors of the analyzer.
8.2.2 Checking/Cleaning Sample Probe

1 On the Daily Maint. page, select System Reset and then click Execute
to clean the sample probe.
2 Check if the flow from inside the sample probe is continuous and in the
direction of the probe. Check the exterior of the sample probe to see
whether the flow is continuous and normal.
If not, clean the sample probe.
If the flow remains abnormal, check corresponding tubing and ensure
the water tank supplies water correctly with normal pressure.
8.2.3 Checking/Cleaning R1/R2 Probes

to clean the reagent probe.
2 Check if the flow from inside the reagent probe is continuous and in the
direction of the probe. Check the exterior of the reagent probe to see
whether the flow is continuous and normal.
If not, clean the reagent probe.
If the flow remains abnormal, check corresponding tubing and ensure
the water tank supplies water correctly with normal pressure.
8.2.4 Checking/Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers

to clean the mixer.
2 During the cleaning process, check whether the mixer rotates correctly
and water surge in the wash well of mixer works normally.
If not, check corresponding tubing and ensure the water tank supplies
water correctly with normal pressure.
8.2.5 Checking Connection of Deionized Water

1 Open the front doors of the analyzer.
2 Pull out the hydropneumatic drawer. Check if the inlet ball valve is
turned on (the handle of ball valve is placed level) and DI water exists
in the water tank.

3 Check all connectors for leakage. If leakage does exist, find the
reasons and take actions accordingly.
4 Restore the drawer.
6 If the water supply module is equipped, please ensure it is properly
connected to the analyzer.
7 Check if the water supply module is powered on.
CAUTION
Make sure the tubing in the hydropneumatic drawer is neither clogged
nor bent.
8.2.6 Checking Waste Tubing
BIOHAZARD
To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves and lab coat
and, if necessary, goggles when checking the waste tubing.
Check if the waste drainage system works normally. Ensure the waste tubing is
neither bent nor clogged, and the high-/low-concentration waste is handled properly
according to local regulations and rules for waste disposal.
CAUTION
Ensure the waste tubing is neither clogged nor bent. Clogged or bent
waste tubing may lead to waste overflow that can damage your analyzer.
8.2.7 Checking Vacuum/Pressure Pumps

1 Ensure the analyzer is in Standby status.
2 Open the front doors of the analyzer and check the readings on the
vacuum/pressure gauges.

NOTE
The readings and reference ranges for vacuum and
pressure are:
Primary pressure gauge: 25.0 psig; Reference range:
0.14-0.21MPa.
Secondary pressure gauge: 5.0 psig; Reference range:
0.03-0.04MPa.
DI water pressure gauge: 10.0 psig; Reference range:
0.06-0.08Mpa.
Vacuum gauge: 27.0Hg (lower than -0.06MPa).
3 If the vacuum/pressure readings are incorrect, adjust the 5psi and 10psi
gauges for pressure regulating valves and adjust the 25psi gauge for
the air pump. Make sure the 25psi gauge is prior.
8.2.8 Checking Printer/Printing Paper

Check if the power and status indicators on the printer are illuminated correctly, and if
sufficient paper is prepared.
8.2.9 ISE Unit (optional)

8.2.9.1 Daily Cleaning
BIOHAZARD
To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and
protective clothing when doing the below checks.
The cleaning solution is irritating to eyes and skin. Avoid contact with
skin and eyes. In case of contact with eyes, rinse immediately with
plenty of water and seek medical advice.
CAUTION
Use the consumables recommended by Mindray. Other consumables
may degrade system performance.
Add solution supplied in the cleaning solution kit to top of label on the
powder bottle that is also supplied in the same kit and shake well to
prepare the cleaning solution.
The cleaning solution must be stored at 2-8C and discarded after two
weeks.

NOTE
The maintenance is necessary to be performed when the ISE unit
(optional) is connected.
You should perform the maintenance once a day after all the samples
are analyzed. Besides, if the samples of a day requested for the ISE
tests are 50 or more, you should perform the maintenance after 50
samples are analyzed.
If you give the electrodes some time to stabilize after cleaning, you will
experience slightly better performance.
1 Enter the ISE screen of the Maintenance of the system software.

2 Select Clean Cycle from the Instructions list.
3 Select Execute. The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select OK to start the
clean cycle.
4 After cleaning, if there are samples requested for the ISE tests to be
run, calibration should be run first. But Mindray recommends running an
ISE calibration after cleaning.
ISE unit daily cleaning can be configured to operate automatically.
8.2.9.2 Pump Calibration

2 Select Pump Calibration Cycle from the Instructions list.
3 Select Execute. The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select OK to start
calibrating the peristaltic pumps.
Pump calibration can be configurated to operate automatically.
8.2.10 Checking the Drying Module

Check the whether the liquid level in air filter (AF20-02C), oil-mist separator
AFM20-02C and mist separator (AFD20-02C) reaches the bottom of the filter core
as indicated in the red line of the following figure. The remaining liquid in them should
not reach the bottom of the filter core (liquid remaining is normal phenomenon. A
certain volume of liquid will remain in the container and can not be emptied. The
maximum dead volume is indicated by the blue circe in the following figure). If the level
is reached which indicates the something wrong with the drainage, you need to contact
the service department. The maintenance method is as follows: Power off the system
and loosen the drain caps or screw at the bottom of the oil mist separator, mist
separator by hand. (the direction is in consistence with the arrow). Reverse it to fasten
the drain cap until the water inside can flow out one drop by one drop. Do not
completely loosen the cap, otherwise, leakage will occur. A certain amount of liquid
should remain in them.

Note
When the liquid is drained, the snob must be tightened to keep the air
tightness of the assembly, otherwise it may cause abnormal pressure of
the analyzer.

8.3 Weekly Maintenance
8.3.1 Cleaning Sample Probe
WARNING
The sample probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the sample probe.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the used gauze in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

2 Uncover the sample compartment and remove the sample disk.
3 Pull the sample probe arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to
move the sample probe to a position above the sample compartment
and convenient to operate.

4
CAUTION
Do not contact the sample probe directly with tweezers;
otherwise the sample probe may be scratched. Excessive
force may bend the sample probe.
NOTE
Mindray recommends the acid and alkaline wash solution
be used alternately for this purpose. For instance, if the
acid wash solution is used for last maintenance, the
alkaline one should be used for this time.
Use wash solution (acid or alkaline) or ethanol-dipped gauze to gently

wipe the exterior of the sample probe until it is clean and smooth.
5 Wipe the sample probe with DI water-dipped gauze.

6 After cleaning, gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate it
to move the sample probe to a position above the wash well.
7 Install the sample disk, tighten the two retaining screws on it and then
cover the sample compartment.
8 Place the Power to ON. Wait for about 30 seconds and then execute
System Reset on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset the
sample probe and rinse it with deionized water.
8.3.2 Cleaning R1/R2 Probes
WARNING
The reagent probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the reagent
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Uncover the reagent compartment and remove the reagent disk by
pulling upwards the handles.
3 Pull the reagent probe arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to
move the reagent probe to a position above the reagent compartment
4
CAUTION
Do not contact the reagent probe directly with tweezers;
otherwise the reagent probe may be scratched. Excessive
force may bend the reagent probe.
NOTE
be used alternately for this purpose. For instance, if the acid
wash solution is used for last maintenance, the alkaline one
should be used for this time.
Use acid or alkaline wash solution-dipped gauze to gently wipe the

exterior of reagent probe until it is clean and smooth.

5 Wipe the reagent probe with DI water-dipped gauze.
6 After cleaning, gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate
the arm to move the reagent probe to a position above the wash well.
7 Install the reagent disk and cover the reagent compartment.
reagent probe and rinse it with deionized water.
8.3.3 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers
BIOHAZARD

2 Pull the mixer arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to move the
mixer to a position convenient to operate.

3
CAUTION
Do not contact the mixer directly with tweezers; otherwise
it may be scratched. Excessive force may bend the mixer.
NOTE
be used alternately for this purpose. For instance, if the
acid wash solution is used for last maintenance, the
alkaline one should be used for this time.
Use acid or alkaline wash solution-dipped gauze to gently wipe the

mixer until it is clean and smooth.
4 Wipe the mixer with DI water-dipped gauze.

5 After cleaning, gently pull the mixer arm to its highest point and rotate
the arm to move the mixer to a position above the wash well.
mixer automatically and rinse it with deionized water.
CAUTION
The mixer is precisely fabricated. In case of scratched or bent mixer,
replace it according to 8.8.6 Replacing Sample/Reagent Mixers.
8.3.4 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Bar Code Reader Windows
CAUTION
Do not stare at the laser of the bar code reader; otherwise your eyes
may get hurt.

2 Uncover the reagent or sample compartment, and remove the reagent

disk or sample disk.
3 Use the wash solution-dipped gauze to wipe the bar code reader
window.
4 Install the reagent disk or sample disk and cover the compartment.
5 Place the Power to ON. After about 30 seconds, the system will reset
automatically.
CAUTION
Do not use sharp-edged tools to scratch the bar code reader window.
8.3.5 Cleaning Sample Disk/Compartment
WARNING
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the sample
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Uncover the sample compartment and remove the sample disk by
pulling upwards the handle.
3 Rinse the sample disk with fresh water and dry it with gauze.
4 Wipe the inside of the sample compartment using clean gauze or, if
necessary, the gauze dipped with water or disinfectant.

5 Install the sample disk and tighten the two retaining screws on it. Then
cover the sample compartment.
8.3.6 Cleaning Reagent Disk/Compartment
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Uncover the reagent compartment and loosen the screws on the
reagent disk. Then remove the reagent disk.
3 Rinse the reagent disk with fresh water and dry it with gauze.
4 Wipe the inside of the reagent compartment using clean gauze or, if
necessary, the gauze dipped with water or disinfectant.

5 Install the reagent disk and together the screws on it. Then cover the
reagent compartment.
8.3.7 Cleaning Panels of Analyzing Unit
WARNING
The probe/mixer tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the probe/mixer.
BIOHAZARD

2 Wipe the panels using clean gauze or, if necessary, the gauze dipped
with water or disinfectant.
8.3.8 Cleaning Reaction Cuvettes

Contaminated reaction cuvettes may lead to incorrect results. The reaction cuvettes
should be cleaned regularly.
1 Place a 60ml bottle filled with diluted concentrated wash solution

concentrated wash solution:DI water=1:10on specified position of
reagent disk.
2 On the Daily Maint. page, select Cuvette Cleaning and then click
Execute. All cuvettes on the reaction disk are washed.
8.3.9 Checking Photometer

Reaction cuvettes and light source should be checked regularly and replaced if
necessary, for contaminated reaction cuvettes and low transmittance may affect

the test results; also weak stability and radiation intensity of the light source will
cause unreliable test results.
Aside from the regular check, checking should be done after the replacement of
cuvettes and lamp.
8.3.9.1 Checking Reaction Cuvettes

After performing enhanced wash of the reaction cuvettes, proceed with the
following steps to check the cuvettes.
1 Enter the Daily Maint. page of the Utilities screen; then select
Cuvette/Lamp Check in the Maintenance area and click Execute.

2 Cuvette check
The photometer check includes cuvette check and lamp check.
Select cuvette check first.
Time for cuvette check: 10 min
On this page, you can view the status of the latest cuvette check.
Different status is marked as four different colors:
Not marked: Normal
Yellow: out of consistance limit ( compared with the cuvette of min ABS,
the difference is above 2500)
Blue:out of uniformity limit.
Red: out of consistence and uniformity limits.
NOTE:
To ensure the good performance of the photometer, replace
those cuvettes marked with yellow, blue or red. Run cuvette
check after replacement, and save the data.
Place DI water in position W. Click Start. After test, the cuvette status
will be refreshed according to the test result. Click Save to save the
result.

NOTE:
If Save is not selcted, the current test result will not be saved.
Next time when you enter this page, the cuvette status will be
the previous test result.
Click Results to view and print the latest ABS value of all the cuvette.
In Cuvette Status page, manually enter the cuvette position or use

to view the test result of any cuvette. The judgement is
shown in Current field. Cuvettes marked as yellow, blue or red will be
judged as dirty cuvettes.

3 Lamp check
NOTE:
Before running lamp check, replace those cuvettes marked as
yellow, blue and red.
Click Lamp check to enter the lamp checking page as shown in the
following figure.
Time for lamp check: 1.5min
In Lamp check page, you can view the latest two lamp check results.
The displayed value is the average of three consecutive cuvette
aborsorbance. When this value is greater than the calculated threshold
value, the lamp intensity is not strong enough. (The calculated
threshold value can be queried through Maintenance System
Maintenance Light Source Setup.)
Click Start to start the lamp check. The test result and the lamp status
will be refreshed after the test. Click Save to save the result.

NOTE:
If Save is not selcted, the current test result will not be saved.
Next time when you enter this page, the lamp status will be the
previous test result.
NOTE:
To ensure the good performance of the photometer, replace
the lamp when the light intensity is not strong enough.
You can readjust the gain after replacing the lamp. When the water
blank is greater than 63,000, you can re-adjust the gain to adjust the
water blank to 4700049000.

8.3.10 Checking Concentrated Wash Solution
WARNING
Always wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles when
checking the wash solution.
If there is no enough concentrated wash solution, system operation may be

interrupted. Perform the following procedures to check the wash solution.
1 On the Daily Maint. page, select System Prime and then click Execute.
2 The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select OK to start
3 Open the front doors of the analyzer and pull the hydropneumatic
assembly drawer outwards.
4 Check if the concentrated wash solution reagent box is empty.

If yes, replace it with a new one.
8.4 Monthly Maintenance

8.4.1 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe
WARNING
probe.

BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the used cotton swabs in accordance with your local or
national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

3 Use cotton swabs to clean the inside of and the places around the
wash well.
4 After cleaning, gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate it
to move the sample probe to a position above the wash well.
System Reset on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset and
rinse the sample probe automatically.

8.4.2 Cleaning Wash Well of R1/R2 Probes
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Pull the reagent probe arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to
wash well.
4 After cleaning, gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate
the arm to move the reagent probe to a position above the wash well.
rinse the reagent probes automatically.

8.4.3 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample/Reagent Mixers
WARNING
The mixer tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury, exercise caution when working around the mixer.
BIOHZARD

wash well.
4 After cleaning, gently pull the mixer arm to its highest point and rotate
the arm to move the mixer to a position above the wash well.
rinse the mixers automatically.

8.4.4 Cleaning Sample Probe Rotor
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Pull the probe arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to move the
sample probe to a position above the sample compartment and
convenient to operate.
3 Wipe the sample probe rotor with clean gauze.
8.4.5 Cleaning R1/R2 Probes Rotors
WARNING
probe.

BIOHAZARD

reagent probe to a position above the reagent compartment and
3 Wipe the reagent probe rotor with clean gauze.
8.4.6 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers Rotors
WARNING
BIOHAZARD


3 Wipe the mixer rotor with clean gauze.
8.4.7 Checking Wash Unit

1 On the Daily Maint. page, select Wash Unit Maintenance and then
click Execute.
2 Check if the upper part of the wipe block is level to the cuvette opening
and the lower part to other wash probes. Adjust the wipe block if
necessary.
3 Check the wash probes for stains and cracks, and replace the probes if
any.
Check Wash Unit

1 On the Daily Maint. page, select Wash Unit Maintenance and then click
Execute.
2 Check if the upper part of the wipe block is level to the cuvette opening and
the lower part to other wash probes. Adjust the wipe block if necessary.
3 Check the wipe block for contamination and crack. Replace the wipe block
if necessary.
Clean Wipe Blocks

1 Loosen the retaining screw of the wash station and dismount the whole

wash unit.
Retaing screw of
the wash unit

2 Rub the wipe blocks with gauze soaked with ethanol until the dust or other
contamination on the wipe blocks are off.
3 Rub the wipe blocks with gauze soaked with DI water until the surface of
the wipe block is clean.
CAUTIONS:
Exercise caution when cleaning the wipe block.
Excessive force may deviate the angel of the wipe
block. If that happens, you should readjust it.
4 Reinstall the wash unit to the holder. The two guide pins on the holder
should be inserted into the guide holes of the wash unit. Fasten the
retaining screws manually.
Guide
pin of
the
wash
unit
Guide
hole of
the
wash
unit

Align The Wipe Blocks and the opening of the cuvettes
2 Manually move the wash unit downward vertically until the wipe blocks
reach the opening of the reaction cuvettes.
3 Check if the upper part of the wipe block is level to the cuvette opening. If
not, adjust the angel of the wipe blocks slightly. Please pay attention that
the thinner part of the wipe blocks should face outward.
The thinner
part of the
wipe blocks
should face
outward.
The wipe
block is level
to the cuvette
opening
4 After alignment, manually insert the wash station wipe blocks into the
cuvettes. Check whether the wipes blocks fits into the cuvettes and
whether the wipe blocks are level to the cuvette walls.
8.4.8 Checking Hydropneumatic Drawer

2 Pull outwards the hydropneumatic drawer.
3 Check if the tubing connectors are leaking or water buildup exists
below the drawer.
If yes, find the reasons and take actions accordingly.

4 Push the drawer inward to restore it.
8.4.9 Cleaning Air Filter, Oil Mist Separator, Mist Separator

1 Place the Main Power to OFF.
2 Remove the bottles of the air filter, oil mist separator and mist separator.

3 Clean the bottles using neutral cleaning solution.
4 Install the bottles back to the bracket.
8.4.10 Replacing Reaction Cuvette

To ensure the accuracy of the test, the reaction cuvette should be replaced
regularly. After being used for a long period, carrayover might happen because
the inner surface of the cuvette may get scratched and the outer surface of the
cuvette may get contaminated to result in unaccurate result.
WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury, exercise caution when working around the probe.
Before replacing cuvette rotate the probes to a position convenient
for operation.
BIOHAZARD:
Dispose of the damaged cuvette in accordance with your local or
CAUTION:
Please use our recommended consumables. Other consumables
may degrade the system performance.
1 Place the Power to OFF

2 Rotate manually the probes and mixers to a position convenient for cuvette
replacement.
3 Remove the reaction disk cover.

CAUTION:
Do not get the reaction disk cover to collide with the wash unit,
when removing the reaction disk cover.
4 Slowly rotate the reaction disk to a position easy to handle.
CAUTION:
Do not drag the optical fibire under the reaction disk.

5 Pull the bullet at the side of the cuvette out with a nipper.
CAUTION:
If your system is installed with hard glass cuvettes, please
take extra care while removing the bullet with the nipper lest
the cuvette get damaged. Use the nipper to clip the
protuberance of the bullet and then pull it out.
6 Use the hand to pinch the side walls of the reaction cuvette and pull it out.
CAUTION:
The gloves should free from fibres and power, otherwise the
optical surface of the cuvette and its neighboring cuvettes
might get contaminated.

7 Install new cuvettes.
CAUTION:
The optical surface of the cuvette should be perpendicular to
the radial direction of the reaction disk.
Press the cuvettes into the bottom of their position on the disk
until no further can be pushed downward.
Do not touch the optical surface of the cuvettes, otherwise the
result might not be reliable. The optical surface is highlight by
red circle in the following figures for glass cuvette and plastic
cuvette respectively.
8 Install the bullets

CAUTION:
Check for cuvettes and bullets that are forgotten to be
installed. If only one cuvette is not installed, the reagent,
sample and wash solution will spill on the reaction disk,
making the analysis unable to proceed.

9 Install the reaction disk back.
CAUTION:
While installing the reaction disk cover, please ensure the two
parts highlighted in the following figure fit into each other. Do
not make the cover collide with the wash unit.
10 Power on the analyzing unit and start the operating software. Check the
cuvette by entering the Utilities-Cuvette/Lamp check screen to make sure
all the cuvettes meet the requirement for use. Please refer to 5.3.8.1.
CAUTION:
In order to get the best data, check the cuvette when the lamp
is stable (that is about at least 20 minutes after startup).
8.5 Three-month Maintenance

8.5.1 Cleaning Dust Screens
1 Place the Main Power to OFF.
3 Remove the dust screens that are located below the reagent syringes
and sample syringe.

Hold the screen with your hands and lift it upwards, then remove it
outwards.
4 Rinse the dust screen with fresh water and dry it by air.
5 Install the dust screens correctly.
8.6 Six-month Maintenance

8.6.1 Replacing Lamp
The lamp of the photometric system ages after a certain period of service. An
aged lamp may introduce extra noise during the analyzing process. Replace the
lamp when its intensity decreases to the specified degree, or the service time of
the lamp has added up to 2,000 hours or system prompts.
CAUTION:
Please use our recommended consumables. Other consumables
may decrease the system performance.
Do not touch either the light entrance of the lamp. In case the
entrance is dirty, clean it with ethanol-soaked absorbent cotton.

1 Place the MAIN POWER to OFF. Wait at least 10 minutes for the lamp
and its base to cool down.
WARNING:
After working for a while, the lamp and its base are usually
hot enough to burn you. Do not proceed with this procedure
until they have cooled down.
2 The light source assembly is at the right rear part of the instrument.
Loosen the screws on the back cover manually or using a screw driver.
Pull the cover upward to remove it.
3 Unscrew the compression nut on the terminal manually. Pull the power
cord out.

4 Unscrew the retaining screws on the lamp base manually. Pull the lamp
out.
5 Install the new lamp in a reverse order and compress the connection
wire. Reintall the back cover properly.
6
NOTE:
Dont pinch the bulb of the lamp so that the lamp will not be
contaminated or broken.
8.6.2 Replacing or Cleaning Air Screen

After using the air screens for a long time, replace the air screens that are bad in
ventilation.
8.6.3 Cleaning Tanks, Floater Switch and Siphon Tube

Remove and install all tanks, clean the tanks and internal parts. See 7.3Replacing
Valves and Tanks.

8.6.4 Maintaining the Air Pump
Replace the air pump and silencer if necessary. See 5.8Structure of Air Pump
Assembly.
8.6.5 Replacing Waste Tubing

If the waste tubing cannot discharge waste smoothly after being used for a long time,
replace it with the specified one.
8.6.6 Replacing First and Second Phase Washing Tubing on

Wash Unit

2 Disconnect the dirty tubing beteen the aspiration wash probe (in the front, the
longer straight probe) and the collecting board. (The No. for the first phase
washing tubing is 12, and 11 for the second phase washing tubing.). Pull the
tubing out from the tubing fixer.

3 Connect one end of the new tubing to the wash probe, and the other passing
through the tubing fixer to its respective adapter on the collecting board. (Be
sure the old tubing sign is added to the new tubing.
8.6.7 Replacing DI Water Filter and the Tubing

The deionized water filter should be replaced by the user in every 3-6 months. If
you find the 91 and 92 tubing is dirty during the replacement of filter, replace
them as well. Perform the following steps:
1 Turn off the ball valve on the hydropneumatic drawer. The water supply
module is powered off.
2 Turn on the ball valve on the water supply module to release the
remaining pressure. When there is no liquid discharged from the air
vent, the pressre release is completed, turn off the ball value.

3 Press the tubing release button to remove the tubing 91 and 92 from
two ends of the old filter assembly. (If these tubings are dirty, replace
them)
4 Connect the tubing 91 and 92 to the two ends of the new filter
assembly.
5 Power on the water supply module, turn on the ball valve on it and wait
for 5 minutes. When you see the VENT of the water supply module is
supplying water continuously which sigifies the normal working of the
module, turn off its ball valve.
6 Turn on the ball valve on the hydropneumatic drawer.
8.6.8 Replacing On-line Filters

8.6.8.1 Replacing On-line Filters
The on-line filter should be replaced every 6 months.
1 Place the MAIN POWER to OFF.

2 Open the drawer ;you can see the filter at the outlet of the concentrated wash
solution and between tubing 115 and tubing 116. Please see the following figure.
Note: For the analyzers before EBJ 138, there is one filter respectively at the outlet
of tubing of the concentrated wash solution container and the diluted wash solution
container, which should be replaced.See the figure below
One is located at the left side of the drawer, at the outlet of the concentrated wash
solution container, between the tubing 118 and 119. Please see the following

figure.
One is located at the right side of the drawer, at the outlet of the diluted wash
solution container, between the tubing 123 and 124. Please see the following
figure.
3 After replacing the new filter, reconnect the tubings. If you discover the end of the
tubing is distorted, use sccissors to cut a small part of the tubing and then
reconnect the tubings to ensure good connection. You do not have to pay attention
to the direction of the tubing, while mounting the filter.
4 Check the conncection of the tubings and whether leakage happens at the
adapters.

8.6.9 Wash glass cuvette (Optional)
The glass cuvette might get contaminated by serum and crumb after long time
use, thus the incorrect measurement might yield. We suggest you to wash all the
cuvettes every 6 months.
WARNING:
Please take care during operation to avoid being hurt by the sample probe or
reagent probe.
Put the probes and bars at the place that is convenient to handle during
replacement.
BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles. Dispose of the
replaced cuvettes properly.
NOTE:
Please use our recommended consumables. Other consumables may
degrade the system performance.
1 Power off the analyzing unit.

2 Rotate manually the probes and mixers to a position convenient for cuvette
replacement.
3 Remove the reaction disk cover.

CAUTION:
Do not get the reaction disk cover to collide with the wash unit,
when removing the reaction disk cover.

4 Slowly rotate the reaction disk to a position easy to handle.
CAUTION:
Do not drag the optical fibire under the reaction disk.
5 Pull the bullet at the side of the cuvette out with a nipper.
CAUTION:
If your system is installed with hard glass cuvettes, please
take extra care while removing the bullet with the nipper lest
the cuvette get damaged. Use the nipper to clip the
protuberance of the bullet and then pull it out.

6 Use the hand to pinch the side walls (the frost side) of the reaction cuvette
and pull it out.
CAUTION:
The gloves should free from fibres and power, otherwise the
optical surface of the cuvette and its neighboring cuvettes
might get contaminated.
7 If consipucuous condensation of reagent is observed on the outside wall of

the cuvette, we suggest you to clean it with absolute alcohol and then put the
cuvette in a open container filled with 10% concentrated wash solution.
Cover the container and put it in room temperature for 2 hours.
CAUTION:
The cuvettes should be soaked completed in the wash
solution. No bubble in the inside of the cuvette, otherwise the
quality of the wash might be affected.
8 Take the cuvettes out of the open container and wash them with DI water
thoroughly. Rub the outside surface of the cuvette with clean and dry gauze.
CAUTION:
If scratch or unremovable contamination occurs on the optical
surface of the cuvette, please dispose of them properly and
replace them with new ones.
Do not use the cotton swab, cotton, cotton cloth or any other
tools containing fibres to clean the cuvette, otherwise the
fibres might get on the optical surface of the cuvette and the
result might be affected.

CAUTION:
The optical surface of the cuvette should be perpendicular to
the radial direction of the reaction disk. The optical surface is
highlight by red circle in the following figures for glass cuvette
and plastic cuvette respectively.
Press the cuvettes into the bottom of their position on the disk
until no further can be pushed downward.
Do not touch the optical surface of the cuvettes, otherwise the
result might not be reliable.
10 Install the bullets
CAUTION:
Check for cuvettes and bullets that are forgotten to be
installed. If only one cuvette is not installed, the reagent,
sample and wash solution will spill on the reaction disk,
making the analysis unable to proceed.

11 Install the reaction disk back.
CAUTION:
While installing the reaction disk cover, please ensure the two
parts highlighted in the following figure fit into each other. Do
not make the cover collide with the wash unit.
12 Power on the analyzing unit and start the operating software. Check the
cuvette by entering the Utilities-Cuvette/Lamp check screen to make sure all
the cuvettes meet the requirement for use. Please refer to 5.3.8.1.
CAUTION:
In order to get the best data, check the cuvette when the lamp
is stable (that is about 20 minutes after startup).
8.7 Yearly Maintenance

8.7.1 Maintaining the Air Pump
If used for a long time, the Filter lilencer (Filter silencer,F02,BSPT1/4") will be
blocked and the flow volume will be reduced. So, the silencer should be replaced
every year. Replace the tubing if necessary.
1 Plece the Main Power to OFF.

2 Open the right plate of the system, and unplug the vacuum and pressure
tubing. Open the board of the pump.

3 Unplug the tubing connecting the silencer, and detach the silencer hold
connector.
4 Replace the old silencer with a new one.
5 Check the internal tubing. If dust is collected, replace it.

6 Install the silencer holder connector into the air pump assembly, insert the
tubings and install the board back.
7 Insert the pressure and vacuum interface tubing. Install the right plate.

8.8 As-Needed Maintenance
8.8.1 Unclogging Sample Probe
When the sample probe is clogged, the fluid flow will become abnormal. Follow this
procedure to remove, unclog and install the sample probe.
8.8.1.1 Removing Sample Probe
WARNING
BIOHAZARD

2 Uncover the sample compartment and remove the sample disk by
pulling upwards the handle.
sample probe to a position above the sample compartment and

4 Grab the lower part of the arm cover with your hands and pull them
slightly outwards and then remove the cover upward from the arm
base.
5 Hold the sample probes fluid connector with one hand and the tubing
connector with the other hand. Rotate the tubing connector
counter-clockwise until it disconnects from the sample probe. Remove
the tubing from the probe.
6 Press the circuit board with one hand and disconnect the circuit
connector from the board with the other hand.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when disconnecting the connector.
Excessive force may damage the connector and/or the
circuit board.

7 Use a small screwdriver to remove the retaining screw on the sample
probe and take out the spring.
8
WARNING
Store the removed sample probe in a safe place where it
will neither endanger people working around the area nor
be damaged.
NOTE
Exercise caution when pulling the sample probe away
from the arm so that the probe tip will not contact or even
damage the probe arm.
Slowly pull the probe away from the probe arm. Exercise caution so
that the gasket inside the probe does not drop out and if it does, store it
in a clean place for later installation. Replace the gasket if it has been
disassembled for 2 to 3 times. Otherwise leakage may occur or
sampling precision be affected.
NOTE
The sample probe is precisely fabricated for accurate
aspiration/dispensing. In case of scratched or bent sample probe,
replace it.
8.8.1.2 Unclogging Sample Probe
WARNING
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the used needle in accordance with your local or national

1 Use a needle to unclog the sample probe from the tip.
CAUTION
replace it.
8.8.1.3 Installing Sample Probe
WARNING
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Insert the sample probe back into the hole on probe arm, and align the
hole on probe plate to the rotor inside the arm.
3 Sleeve the spring on the rotor and screw the retaining screw to secure.
4 Pinch the sample probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push
the probe upward and then release it to see if the spring can move
freely.

If yes, proceed to the next step.
If not, check for errors and try again after removing the errors.
5 Connect the sample probes circuit connector back to the circuit board.
6 Screw clockwise the probes fluid connector back to the tubing
connector.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when connecting the sample probe.
Excessive force may bend the probe.
7 Power on the analyzer after confirming that the sample probe is not in
contact with any conductible matter (like hands).
8 Manual adjustment: Obeserve the D2 indicator (yellow). The D2
indicator will be on 2 seconds after the power of the analyzer is on.
Press the switch of the level sensing board S2. D2 indicator also goes
through a process of OFF-ON procedure which indicates the
adjustment is successfully completed. (During the process of
adjustment, please make sure the probe is not in contact with any
conductible matter).

9 Fill the clean open container with DI water. Put the tip of the sample
probe 2-3 mm under the water level. The indicator D5 on the level
sensing board will go through a process of OFF-ON procedure. After
the tip of the sample probe is taken way from the water, the indicator
D5 will go off, which shows the function of the board is normal. Proceed
to the next step.
10 Install the probe arm and make sure it is clicked properly into the arm
base.
11 Pinch the sample probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push
the probe upward and then release it to see if the spring can move
freely.
12 Gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate it to move the
probe to a position above the wash well.
CAUTION
After installation, be sure to move the sample probe to a
position above its wash well.
13 Install the sample disk and cover the sample compartment.

rinse the sample probe automatically.
CAUTION
replace it.
8.8.2 Unclogging R1/R2 Probes

When the reagent probe is clogged, the fluid flow will become abnormal. Follow this
procedure to remove, unclog and install the reagent probe.

WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD
8.8.2.1 Removing Reagent Probe
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Uncover the reagent compartment and remove the reagent disk.
3 Pull the reagent probe arm to the highest point. Then rotate the arm to
4 Grab the lower part of the arm cover and pull them slightly outwards
and remove the cover upward from the arm base.
5 Hold the reagent probes fluid connector with one hand and the tubing
connector with the other hand. Rotate the tubing connector
counter-clockwise until it disconnects from the reagent probe. Remove
the tubing from the probe.

6 Press the circuit board with one hand and disconnect the circuit
connector from the board with the other hand.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when disconnecting the connector.
Excessive force may damage the connector and/or the
circuit board.
7 Use a small screwdriver to remove the retaining screw on the reagent

probe and take out the spring.
8
WARNING
Store the removed reagent probe in a safe place where it
will neither endanger people working around the area nor
be damaged.
NOTE
Exercise caution when pulling the probe away from the
arm so that the probe tip will not contact or even damage
the probe arm.
Slowly pull the probe away from the probe arm. Exercise caution so
that the gasket inside the probe does not drop out and if it does, store it
in a clean place for later installation. Replace the gasket if it has been
disassembled for 2 to 3 times. Otherwise leakage may occur or
sampling precision be affected.
NOTE
The reagent probe is precisely fabricated for accurate
aspiration/dispensing. In case of scratched or bent reagent probe,
replace it.

8.8.2.2 Unclogging Reagent Probe
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the used needle in accordance with your local or national
1 Use a needle to unclog the reagent probe from the tip.
CAUTION
replace it.
8.8.2.3 Installing Reagent Probe
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Insert the reagent probe back into the hole on probe arm, and align the
hole on probe plate to the rotor inside the arm.
3 Sleeve the spring on the rotor and screw the retaining screw to secure.
4 Pinch the reagent probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the
probe upward and then release it to see if the spring can move freely.
5 Connect the reagent probes circuit connector back to the circuit board.
6 Screw the probes fluid connector back to the tubing connector.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when connecting the sample probe.
Excessive force may bend the probe.

7 Power on the analyzer after confirming that the reagent probe is not in
contact with any conductible matter (like hands).
8 Manual adjustment: Obeserve the D2 indicator (yellow). The D2 indicator
will be on 2 seconds after the power of the analyzer is on. Press the switch
of the level sensing board S2. D2 indicator also goes through a process of
OFF-ON procedure which indicates the adjustment is successfully
completed. (During the process of adjustment, please make sure the
probe is not in contact with any conductible matter).
9 Fill the clean open container with DI water. Put the tip of the reagent probe
2-3 mm under the water level. The indicator D5 on the level sensing board
will go through a process of OFF-ON procedure. After the tip of the sample
probe is taken way from the water, the indicator D5 will go off, which shows
the function of the board is normal. Proceed to the next step. See 8.8.1.3
Installing Sample Probe for details.
10 Install the probe arm and make sure it is clicked properly into the arm
base.
11 Pinch the reagent probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the
probe upward and then release it to see if the spring can move freely.
If not, reinstall the arm cover and check the spring.

12 Gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate it to move the
reagent probe to a position above the wash well.
CAUTION
After cleaning, be sure to move the reagent probe to a
position above its wash well.
13 Install the reagent disk and cover the reagent compartment.

System Reset on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset and rinse
the reagent probes automatically.
CAUTION
replace it.
8.8.3 Replacing Sample Probe

If the sample probe is bent or damaged, follow this procedure to replace it
immediately.
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD
CAUTION
Please use Mindray-recommended consumables. Other consumables
1 Remove the bent or damaged sample probe.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the bent or damaged sample probe in
accordance with your local or national guidelines for
biohazard waste disposal.

2 Install a new sample probe.
CAUTION
After installing the sample probe, be sure to rotate it to a
position above the wash well prior to sample disk
installation.
8.8.4 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe

When too much water exists in sample probe wash well and cannot be drained, the
wash well might have been clogged. You should follow this procedure to clean the
wash well.
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

3 Add alkaline wash solution, javel water with 0.5% active chlorine. or 84
disinfectant (1ml) to the wash well and soak it for 10 minutes.
4 Place the Power to ON.
6 Execute System Reset on the Daily Maint. page. The system will
reset and rinse the sample probe and wash well automatically with
deionized water. Check if the sample probe wash well drains liquid
normally.
8.8.5 Replacing R1/R2 Probes

If the reagent probe is bent or damaged, follow this procedure to replace it
immediately.
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

CAUTION
1 Remove the bent or damaged probe.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the bent or damaged reagent probe in
accordance with your local or national guidelines for
biohazard waste disposal.
2 Install a new reagent probe.
CAUTION
After installing the reagent probe, be sure to rotate it to a
position above the wash well prior to reagent disk
installation.
8.8.6 Replacing Sample/Reagent Mixers

If the mixer is bent or damaged, follow this procedure to replace it immediately.
WARNING
When replacing, pinch the mixer only by its knurled part. Protect the
flat part of the mixer from scratches.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the damaged mixer in accordance with your local or
CAUTION

2 Prepare a new mixer. Wash the flat part of the new mixer with wash
solution-dipped gauze or cotton swabs and then wipe it with DI
water-dipped gauze.
3 Gently pull the mixer to its highest point and rotate it to a position
4
CAUTION

When trying to pull out the mixer, concentrate your force in
the direction of the axis on the mixer arm. Biased force
may damage the mixer and/or the axis.
Pinch the mixer by the knurled part and unscrew counter-clockwise the
retaining nut until the mixer looses. Pull the mixer downward to remove
it and remove the nut.
5 Align the new mixer to the bigger hole of the retaining nut and gently
screw it into the nut until the end of the mixer is in line with the smaller
hole of the nut.

6 Pinch the mixer by the knurled part and align the nut hole to the axis of
the mixer and push the nut onto the mixer until it reaches the end of the
mixer. Tighten the nut by screwing it clockwise.
CAUTION
When trying to push the mixer into the arm, concentrate
your force in the direction of the axis on the mixer arm.
Biased force may damage the mixer and/or the axis.
Ensure the mixer is all the way pushed to the end.
7 After replacing the bar, visually check whether the mixer is vertical to
the bar arm.
If not, return to step 5 to remove the mixer and reinstall it.
8 Pull the mixer arm to its highest point and rotate it back to a position
above its wash well.
CAUTION
After installing the mixer, be sure to rotate it to a position
above its wash well.
rinse the mixers automatically.
8.8.7 Replacing Syringe Plunger Assembly

The plungers of sample and reagent syringes may be worn out after a certain period
of service. A worn-out plunger may lead to leakage, which will consequently result in
inaccurate aspiration and unreliable test results. You should check the syringes
everyday and replace the old plunger assembly with a new one when,
The old one has served for 6 months; or

The old one has been used for over 100,000 tests; or
The old one is apparently damaged.
WARNING
CAUTION
Exercise caution when installing the plunger assembly. Excessive force
may crack the syringe.
Always wear gloves while replacing the syringe plunger assembly.

Plunger assembly of sample syringe can be replaced in the same way as that of
reagent syringe. Perform the following steps to replace the reagent syringe plunger
assembly.

2 Open the front doors of the analyzer. You will see the sample syringe on
the right and two reagent syringes on the left.
3 Prepare a new plunger assembly as shown in the figure below. Soak the
plunger tip in deionized water to eliminate bubbles.
Plunger Tip Plunger Rod Plunger Button

Plunger Guide Cap
4 Unscrew counter-clockwise the four upper retaining screws of the

syringe, then remove the screws and space bar.
5 Unscrew counter-clockwise the lower retaining screw of the syringe, then
remove the syringe from the holder.
6
CAUTION
There may be residual water in the syringe connector. Do not
drop water onto the analyzing unit during operation.
Grab the T-piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other
hand and unscrew counter-clockwise the syringe. Exercise caution so
that the gasket on the syringe does not drop out and if it does, store it in a
clean place for later installation. Replace the gasket if it has been
disassembled for 2 to 3 times. Otherwise leakage may occur or sampling
precision be affected.
7
CAUTION
There may be residual water in the syringe. Do not drop
water onto the analyzing unit during operation.
The plunger rod of the syringe is slender. Exercise caution
when working on it. Excessive force may bend it.
Unscrew counter-clockwise the plunger guide cap, pinch the plunger

button and gently pull the plunger assembly from the syringe.
8
CAUTION
The plunger rod of the syringe is slender. Exercise caution
when working on it. Excessive force may bend it.

Pinch the new plunger assembly by the plunger button and carefully
insert the plunger tip into the syringe and push it all the way to the end.
Screw clockwise the plunger guide cap until secure.
9 Immerse the syringe connector into deionized water. Pinch the plunger
button, pull it to aspirate half syringe of deionized water and then push it
to expel the deionized water and the air from the syringe.
1 Grab the T-piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other
0 hand. Screw clockwise the syringe into the T-piece until secure.
11 Place the syringe on the holder.
1 Install the space bar and four upper retaining screws. Do not tighten the
2 screws now.
1 Align the plunger button to the lower retaining screw of the plunger and
3 screw clockwise the screw until secure.
1 Pinch the plunger guide cap to adjust the syringe.
4
1 Tighten the four upper retaining screws.
5
1 Place the Power to ON. Wait for about 30 seconds, then execute System
6 Prime on the Daily Maint. page. Repeat the instruction for several times if
necessary, and check if the T-piece is leaking.
If not, go to the next step.
If yes, tighten the syringe. If leakage remains, replace the connector and
T-piece.
7
8.8.8 Removing Air Bubbles

When you see air bubbles in the syringe, follow this procedure to remove them.
BIOHAZARD
protective clothing when doing the maintenance.
Dispose of the waste in accordance with your local or national

2 Loosen the screws on the syringe cover and remove the cover. You can
see the two reagent syringes on the left and sample syringe on the
right.
3 Loosen the four upper retaining screws of the syringe, then remove the
screws and space bar.
4 Loosen the four lower retaining screws of the syringe and remove the
syringe from the holder.

5 Pull the plunger gently outwards until you can not proceed any more,
and then push it quickly. Repeat this pull-push operation until the air
bubbles are removed from the syringe.
CAUTION
Be sure not to push the plunger to the end tip; otherwise the
syringe may be damaged.
6 Place the syringe on the holder. Install the space bars and tighten the
upper retaining screws.
NOTE
The upper edge of the upper space bar must reach the 7
scale on the syringe.
When fixing the retaining screws, be sure to tighten them
alternately with equilibrium force.
7 Tighten counterclockwise the lower retaining screw until secure.
8.8.9 Replacing Reaction Cuvette

After the Cuvette/Lamp Check instruction is performed, if a cuvette is found to be
damaged, write down the cuvette number and follow this procedure to replace the
cuvette.
This procedure is applicable to replacing small quantity of cuvettes. When large

number of cuvettes needs to be replaced, please refer to Replacing Cuvette in
monthly maintenance.
WARNING
Before replacing cuvette rotate the probes to a position convenient for
operation.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the damaged cuvette in accordance with your local or
CAUTION
1 Place the Power to OFF

2 Rotate manually the probes and mixers to a position convenient for
cuvette replacement and then remove the reaction disk cover.
3 Rotate the reaction carousel to move the cuvettes to a position easy for
handling.
CAUTION
Exercise caution and do not drag the fiber bundle under
the reaction carousel.
Do not drag
the fiber
bundle

4 Use a pair of tweezers to take out the metal plate.
5 Use a pair of tweezers to take out the cuvettes.

CAUTION
Make sure the optical surface of the reaction cuvette
perpendicular to the radial of the reaction carousel.
Insert the cuvette to the bottom of its installation position.
Avoid contacting the the optical surface of the reaction
cuvette
7 Install the metal plates.
CAUTION
Check if some metal plates are forgotten to be installed.
8 Restore the reaction carousel cover.
8.8.10 Washing Glass cuvette (Optional)

After executing the Cuvette/Lamp Check in Utilities- Daily Maint., wash the
cuvettes which do not meet the requirement. Please refer to 8.7.9 for details.
8.8.11 Adjust Pressure

During start-up initialization or wake-up initialization, if alarm happens, enter the the
Utilities-Daily Maint. screen and select the Adjust Pressure, then click Execute
button. You can check the pressure value and vacuum value in the following screen.
Adjust the 25psi pressure through adjusting the safety valve; adjust the 10psi
regulating valve and 5psi regulating valve to adjust the pressure value of 10psi and
5psi.

The adjustment of safety valve:
When the 25psi pressure exceeds the alarm limit of 20-30psi, it can be restored to
around 25psi by adjust the safety valve. The adjustment method is as follows:
1. Pull the safety valve knob out. Operate after unlock the knob;
2. Adjust the knob until the specified pressure reaches around 25psi. Rotating to the L
direction to decrease the pressure and rotating to the H direction to increase the
pressure.
3. When the target pressure is reached, pull the knob inside to lock it , avoiding
pressure fluctuation.
Precaution on the safety valve operation:
1. Before adjusting the pressure, be sure to pull the knob out to unlock it, otherwise
the rotating might damage the knob.
2. When you rotate the knob to the L direction until the extreme is reached, the knob
will be locked and can not be restored. So, take extra care to observe the 25 psi
pressure value.

8.8.12 Replacing Check Valve
1 Place the MAIN POWER to OFF
2 Open the drawer and locate the following check valves.

Under the drying module-air filter-tubing label 195. The check valve is between
the tubing 197 and 198.

3 After replacing the new filter, reconnect the tubings. If you discover the end of
the tubing is distorted, use sccissors to cut a small part of the tubing and then
reconnect the tubings to ensure good connection.
NOTE:
While replacing the check valves, pay attion to their
directions.
The flow direction of the liquid in the check valve is shown in the following
figure.
4 Check the conncection of the tubings and whether leakage happens at the
adapters.
8.9 Maintaining ISE Module(Optional)
BIOHAZARD:
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Generally after the replacement of any of the following components,
several ISE calibrations should be run before ISE Unit become stable.
8.9.1 Replacing Reagent Pack

1 Place the POWER to OFF.
2 Open the ISE unit door.
3 Remove and install a new reagent module.

5 Select Purge Combination from the Instructions list. Enter 25 in the
edit boxes next to Purge A and Purge B in Parameters area, then select
Execute to start the purge cycle.
6 Execute Purge A Cycle and Purge B Cycle and check whether the
initialization of the Reagent Pack is finished. If no error occurs during
the process, the Reagent Pack is replaced successfully.
8.9.2 Replacing Electrodes
WARNING:
Before performing the replacement, make sure the analyzer is
powered off.
If you run no more than 100 samples requested for the ISE tests a day, replace the
electrodes according to the following recommended schedule:
Na+ Electrode 6 months

K+ Electrode 6 months
Cl- Electrode 6 months
Reference Electrode 6 months
If you run more than 100 samples requested for the ISE tests a day, replace the
electrodes according to the following recommended schedule:
Na+ Electrode 10,000 samples

K+ Electrode 10,000 samples
Cl- Electrode 10,000 samples
Reference Electrode 10,000 samples
NOTE:
Because the electrodes must be installed sequentially, you
have to take out the electrode to be replaced and those (or
that) over it from above to below.

2 Select Maintenance Cycle from the Instructions list and select Execute.
The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select OK to start maintaining the ISE
module.
3 Replace the electrodes.
4 Execute Purge A Cycle. If no error occurs during the process, it means
the electrode is replaced successfully.
8.9.3 Replacing Tubing

This maintenance operation must be performed by service personnel.

8.9.4 ISE Unit Storage (optional)
BIOHAZARD:
CAUTION:
The maintenance is necessary to be performed when the ISE unit
(optional) is connected.
The ISE unit (optional) should be on power all the time. In some cases
that the POWER will be shut down for a long time more than half an
hour, the following steps should be performed.

2 Select Clean Cycle from the Instructions list and select Execute.
3 Pull out the joint A and joint B of the wand tubing which has been
inserted into the adapters of the pump tubing. Hold them on for a few
seconds until the solution in the wand tubing flows back to Reagent
Pack.
4 Select Purge Combination from the Instructions list, and enter digit
25 in the edit boxes to the right of Purge A and Purge B. Select
Execute to start the purge cycle based on the parameters you have
entered.
5 Select Maintenance Cycle from the Instructions list and select
Execute.
6 Remove the electrodes.
7 Remove the Reagent Pack.
8 Put the reference, Na+, Cl- and spacer electrodes into their individual
sealed bags.

9 Aspirate a small amount of Calibrant A from the port of the reagent
module with a syringe and inject it into the lumens of the K+
electrode(and Li+ electrode) until the lumens are full.
Cover both ends of the lumens with tapes to prevent the Calibrant A
flows from the lumens.
Put the K+ electrode into their individual sealed bags.
NOTE:
The tube adapters on Reagent Pack should be covered by the red
caps. Store the Reagent Pack properly.

9 Test and Maintenance
Software
9.1 Basic Operations

9.1.1 Logging On
The system Test and Maintenance Software applies to the following users:
Debug user: Development engineers of Mindray

Production user: Production personnel of Mindray.
Maintenance user: Service engineers and users.
9.1.2 Overview
9.1.2.1 Screen Layout
The main screen of the test and maintenance software consists of two parts. See
Figure 9-1.
9 Test and Maintenance Software 9-1

Figure 9-1 Screen layout of system Test and Maintenance Software
The upper area provides various function buttons to test each unit.
The lower area displays the communication data associated with the main
unit/subunits. Different colors indicate different types of data frames. The lower-right
area provides options and buttons to control the communication frame.
9.1.2.2 Function Distribution

The basic operation commands of main unit/subunits are included in the tab of
corresponding unit, which also includes other functions like serial port setup, version
query, dark current test, sending instruction, etc.
9.1.2.3 Data Storage

The system saves under the startup directory all data of each unit produced since the
current startup. The data includes:
CleanWaterTempData.txt: Temperature of wash solution.
ISE.txt: Test records of ISE unit.
pressure.txt: Pressure test data.
ReacTempData.txt: Reaction disk temperature.
Disp.txt: All data frames that comply with the communication protocol.
recv.txt: All data that reach the serial port.
Additionally, a Save button is provided on the working page of some units.
9-2 9 Test and Maintenance Software

9.1.3 Operating Commands
9.1.3.1 Main Unit
On the Main Unit screen includes the following commands:
Shakehand: Select this command to shake hand with the main unit.
Download Parameters: Reserved.
Enable modify parameters: Select this command to enable modifying the

parameters of all units.
Disable modify parameters: Select this command to disable modifying the

parameters of all units.
Mechanical reset: Select this command to reset the mechanical parts of

subunits.
System reset: Select this command to reset the subunits of the analyzer.
Serial Port Setup: Set up serial port information. COM1-6 is supported.
Unit Version: Select this command to view the versions of main unit and
subunits.
Dark Current: Select this command to inquire the dark current at each
wavelength after 2 minutes the lamp is turned off. Dark current check is often
required before the photoelectric unit and basic performance are tested.
Send instruction: Enter an instruction and select this command to send it.
Please note that this function can be performed only by debug users.
System prime: Select this command to prime the water tank. The system
will stop automatically once the water tank is full.
Sleep: Select this command to make the main unit enter sleep status.
Wake up: Select this command to wake up the main unit.
Search Log: Select this command to view the event logs of the main unit.
9.1.3.2 Probe and Mixer Units

The probes and mixers can be debugged easily. This section introduces the
confusing commands of the two types of units.
Positions of the probes and mixers:
To top of : Select this command to move the probe/mixer to the top of
To vertical home position: Select this command to move the probe/mixer to

its vertical home position.
To ver. Limit of: Select this command to move the probe/mixer to its lowest
vertical position.
Into: Select this command to move the probe/mixer to the fixed position
of
To liquid of : Select this command to move the probe/mixer to the liquid

level of or to the lowest vertical position in case of no liquid.
for steps: Select this command to move the probe/mixer for configured
steps, which are related to the parameter configuration of the unit.
Syringe empty: Select this command to move the syringe to the home
position.
Syringe reset: Select this command to move the syringe to the zero position
and then to the home position.
Syringe full: Select this command to move the syringe to the obverse limit
position.
9.1.3.3 Reagent Disk Unit

Shakehand: Select this command to shake hand with the reagent disk unit.(This
command is similar to that of other units.)
Reset reagent disk: Select this command to reset the reagent disk unit.(This
command is similar to that of other units.)
Rotate to given position: Select this command to rotate the reagent disk at
specified speed for given circles and then stop it on specified position.
Find zero position: Select this option to rotate the reagent disk to the zero
position and then rotate it at specified speed for given circles and then stop
it on specified position.
Rotate obversely: Select this option to rotate the reagent disk clockwise.
Rotate for given positions: This command is similar to Rotate to given position
except that the reagent disk rotates for given positions and then stops.
9.1.3.4 Sample Disk Unit

Indicator Control: The indicator may appear in three status, which include On,
Flash and Off.
Other commands of the sample disk unit are similar to that of the reagent disk unit.
9.1.3.5 Reaction Disk Unit

Rotate for given positions: Select this command to rotate the reaction disk
clockwise for given steps. The rotating distance is related to the parameter
configuration of the reaction disk unit.
Rotate and measure: Select this command to rotate the reaction disk at highest
speed for one circle and then stop it on position 2. During the rotating, photometric
measurement is performed.
Adjust lamp: Select this command to adjust the brightness level(0-255) of the lamp.
The two commands Rotate to given position and Rotate for given positions
are similar to that of the reagent disk unit.
9.1.3.6 Fluidic Unit

The Fluidic Unit tab provides commands that enable you to debug the wash unit,
control the valves and pumps, and inquire/view the current status of all fluidic tanks.

Note: To control the valves in batch, you must:
Understand completely the relationship among all valves and their functions.
Ensure the probes and mixers influenced by current operation are stopped in
their wash wells.
9.1.3.7 Fluidic Pressure Curve

Figure 9-2 Fluidic Pressure Curve screen
On the Fluidic Pressure Curve tab shows the readings of the four pressure gauges.
When all readings cannot be displayed on one screen, they will be shown circularly.
Interval: Set up the interval to take pressure readings.
Range: Set up the Y-coordinate range of the curve.
Start: Start receiving the pressure data and display it. You can control the pressure
data collecting process by using Pause, Resume and Stop.
Save/Load: Save and review the pressure readings.
9.1.3.8 ISE Unit

This section introduces the screen operations of the ISE Unit tab. For test method of
the ISE unit, refer to ISE Test Techniques. The ISE Unit screen consists of four parts:
Step Instructions, Loop Command, Manual Instructions and Debugging. See
Figure 9-3.
Figure 9-3 ISE Unit tab

Step Instructions
Click any command in this area. The corresponding operation will be performed.
Manually Instruction
Multiple buttons in this area should be used during a complete test. The following
operation combinations are available:
Select Pump calib.<PMCL>+Start<START> to test the pumps.

Select Wash<CLEAN>+Start<START> to perform cleaning.
Select Serum<SAMP>+Start<START> to perform serum test.
Select Urine1<UWBW>+Urine2<UWBW>+Start<START> to perform urine test.
Loop Command
The commands in this area can be performed circularly. On the left is the circular
command control area and on the right is the instruction area.
Note: Since the ISE module is external, a false result will be returned immediately
after an instruction is sent to it, and the true result will be returned after a period.
However, the software will start the next cycle once receiving a result. Therefore,
Interval should be set up carefully.
Debugging
The commands provided in this area are used to debug the ISE unit and can be
operated in the same way as the Step Instructions.
Figure 9-4 Debugging

9.1.3.9 Bar Code Unit
Figure 9-5 Bar Code Unit
This section introduces the screen operations of the Bar Code tab.
Debugging bar code reader
1. Select a bar code type: Sample Bar Code or Reagent Bar Code.
2. Select Initialize to initialize the corresponding bar code reader.
3. Select Laser on or Laser off to align the bar code reader.
Scanning test
1. Select a scan mode, which includes Dynamic, Dynamic and Static, and

Static.
2. Set up the start position, interval and cycles for scanning.
3. Select Scan to start scanning.
During scanning, you can select Pause, Resume or Stop to control the
operation.
Judge the scanning result.
All instructions that are sent or received are displayed in the box on
right-hand side of the screen. You can save or clear the instructions if
needed.
Testing scanning stability
This operation is similar to the scanning test except that the options like scan mode
and start position must not be configured.
Sending instructions
Enter the original command and select Send Instruction to send it directly.

9.1.3.10 Reaction Disk Temperature
Figure 9-6 Reaction Disk Temp. screen
This chapter introduces the functions of the Reaction Disk Temp. screen.
Inquiring power of reaction disk heater and temperature of sensor
1. Set up the times of taking temperature and power readings and the interval
between two readings.
2. Set up the Y-coordinate range for displaying temperature curve.
3. Select Start to start taking the temperature and power readings. During the
reading process,
You can stop or pause the taking operation, and then save and load history
readings.
You can adjust dynamically the Y-coordinate range of the temperature
curve.
You can zoom in the curve display area as needed.
The temperature data since the current startup are saved in the directory
where the test and maintenance software locates.
Checking sensor parameters and configuring the parameters
Select a sensor in the Correction Data area.
Enter the resistance corresponding to the temperature of each sensor.
Select Calculate to calculate the parameters of the sensor and judgment whether
the sensor is qualified or not.
Select Save to save the sensor parameters.
Inquiring, configuring and adjusting PID parameters
1. Select Current in the PID area to inquiring the PID parameters.

2. Select Save to save the edited PID parameters.
3. Select Self-adjust to notify the corresponding subunit to start adjusting the

PID parameters.
Testing heater control
Select Heater on or Heater off. If the command is not executed correctly, select it
again.
9.1.3.11 Wash Solution Temperature

The Wash Solution Temp. is similar to the Reaction Disk Temp. screen and can be
operated in the same way. See 9.1.3.10 Reaction Disk Temperature for details.
9.1.3.12 Photoelectric Unit

The Photoelectric Unit screen provides a function that enables you to perform the
following three tests for photometric measurement:
Measuring specified cuvette while the reaction disk is rotating
1. Select the check box next to Reaction disk rotates and deselect Measure
90 cuvettes.
2. Set up the cuvette position to measure, times and interval for collecting data.
3. Select Start. The AD values at each wavelength for the cuvette are
displayed in tabular and graphic forms.
Measuring specified cuvette in Stop status
1. Deselect the check boxes next to Reaction disk rotates and Measure 90
cuvettes.
2. Set up the cuvette position to measure, times and interval for collecting data.
3. Set up the rotating steps.
4. Select Start. The AD values at each wavelength for the cuvette are
displayed in tabular and graphic forms.
NOTE
After executing this command, you must reset the photoelectric unit
mechanically.
Measuring all 90 cuvettes
1) Select the check box next to Measure 90 cuvettes.
2) Set up the cuvette position to measure, times and interval for collecting data.
3) Select Start. All AD values at each wavelength for the 90 cuvettes are
displayed in tabular form.

9.2 Macro Instructions
9.2.1 Function
Each unit tab of the test and maintenance software only includes the basic
commands and procedures for ordinary alignment, which do not support more
complex or general test. However, the Macro Instruction tab allows you to create
necessary instructions or instruction set (macroinstruction).
9.2.2 Detailed Operations

9.2.2.1 Screen Layout
On the right side of the screen is the Macro Instruction area, in which you can
create and edit macro instructions and execute them circularly.
On the left side of the screen is the Instruction area, in which you can view the
detailed instructions of specified unit. See Figure 9-7.

Figure 9-7 Macro Instruction screen
9.2.2.2 Setting up Macro Instruction Name

1. Select a debug type from the drop-down list box next to Type in the Macro
Instruction area.
2. Select New.
3. Enter the name of the new macro instruction in the popup dialog box, then
select OK. The name appears in the drop-down list box next to Name.
9.2.2.3 Adding Single Command

1) Select or create a macro instruction name.
2) Select a command.
3) Method: Select desired unit and instruction type in the Instruction area. All
qualified instructions of the unit are displayed in the lower table.
4) Entering instruction values.
5) Enter instruction value in the Value column according to other information in

the table. Note:
The contents in the Instruction and Value columns should correspond to

each other. The Instruction column explains the value in the Value
column.
The Description column provides detailed explanation only to the first line
in the Instruction column. The Parameter1 column explains each
instruction of the selected type. You need not to enter the operating
information and parameter for some simple instructions.
The last two lines of the Value column can be left blank.
The Value column for the Reserved instructions can be left blank.
6) Verify the instructions.

After setting up an instruction that can be executed in current system
environment, you can verify if it can function correctly by clicking Send. If
yes, correct response and result frames will be displayed, and even data
frame will be uploaded for some instructions. If not, the information box at
the bottom of the screen will indicate the error in red.
7) Add a command to the macro instruction.
Select Add to Macro. The selected command is added to the macro

instruction list on the right-hand side of the screen. Repeat steps 1) through
5) to add more commands.
8) Select Save below the macro instruction list to save the macro instruction.
The newly-created macro instruction is temporarily stored in the memory. If
not saved, the macro instruction will disappear when you switch to other one
or exit the system.
9.2.2.4 Modifying Macro Instruction

1. Select a macro instruction name.
Select an instruction type and a specific macro instruction in the Macro

Instruction area. All single commands of the instruction are displayed in
the lower list.
2. Select desired command that you want to modify.
Select a command. The table in middle of the screen shows the detailed
information of the command.
3. Modify the macro instruction.
Change the Value of each byte, or reselect a unit name and instruction type
to replace the instruction of the selected No. in the macro instruction list.
4. Save the macro instruction. Select Save to save the macro instruction to the
database.
9.2.2.5 Run a Macro Instruction

If each single command of desired macro instruction can be executed circularly, you
can set the cycle times to a number greater than 1. You can also pause or stop the
executing process by selecting Pause or Stop.
9.2.2.6 Special Use

The Macro Instruction tab also provides a feature that enables certain byte of a
single command to be changed regularly during circular execution of the macro
instruction. Follow this procedure to define the type of a single command:
1) Select desired command that you want to define.
2) Enter the No. of the desired byte of the command in the Instruction Details
area.
3) Enter the delay time in the Delay field, which can be neglected if no delay is
needed before the command is executed.
4) Enter other parameters like low limit, high limit and step. In case the macro

instruction is cycled for many times, when the command is executed, the
corresponding byte of the selected No. will be increased according to the
defined low limit and step until the high limit, then the byte of the low limit
(No.) starts running again.
NOTE
The delay information and byte control information can exist
simultaneously or by themselves.
9.3 Performance
Most performance tests will ask you to configure a start cuvette position.
However, the cuvette on the start position you have selected may contaminate
the wipe block; therefore the system will record the cuvettes which have
experienced performance tests. When running the first performance tests since
started up, the system will ask you to select a cuvette for the performance test
and then record the cuvette, which will no longer be used for the following tests.
9.3.1 Accuracy and Repeatability of Absorbance

9.3.1.1 Introduction
Accuracy means the consistency of the measured absorbance of solution on
chemistry analyzer with the standard value.
Repeatability means the precision among several absorbance values of a solution

measured repeatedly.
9.3.1.2 Operating Procedures and Screen Explanation

Figure 9-8 Performance Screen
1) Prepare N groups of reagents for test.

2) Select a sampling type.
Auto differs from Manual on the sampling method. With Manual sampling, you
should, during testing, add N(reagent groups) groups of reagents manually for
N(times for each group) times.
3) Set up the start reagent position and start cuvette.
Start reagent position is not required when Manual is selected for sampling.
4) Set up the reagent groups and sampling times for each group.
Number of reagent groups should be within 1-6, and the product of group number
and sampling times should be no greater than 90.
5) Set up the reagent volume. This option is not required when Manual is
selected for sampling.
6) Set up the primary and secondary wavelength for each reagent group. Up to
6 groups of wavelength are allowed.
7) Set up the start period for testing.
Start Period means the period from which photometric measurement should be
performed since reagent is dispensed. In case of Manual sampling, the photometric
measurement is performed immediately after reagent is dispensed.
8) Select Start to start testing.
Once testing is started, the system first washes N(number of reagent groups *
sampling times for each group) cuvettes and then dispense reagents for each of
them. In Manual sampling mode, the system will remind you to dispense reagent
successively. In the start period, the system starts measuring each reaction cuvette
and takes the absorbance value of different wavelengths.
9) When photometric measurement is finished, the system calculates the AV,

SD and CV at different wavelengths of each reagent group according to the
absorbance values.
10) Select Save to save the test results in a .txt file.
11) To review history test results, select Load. The results are displayed in the
middle of the screen.
9.3.2 Stability of Absorbance

Stability means the difference between the maximum and minimum absorbance
values of a solution that are obtained from multiple measurements during a long
time.

The stability test is similar to the accuracy and repeatability test, except:
N(number of reagent groups) cuvettes are washed during the stability test.
The stability test allows photometric measurement to be performed when the
reaction disk is rotating or stopped.

When reagent is dispensed during stability test, the system will remind user to
add paraffin.
9.3.2.3 Summary
The stability of absorbance should comply with the corresponding requirements, that
is, be no greater than 100.
9.3.3 Linearity of Absorbance

Linearity test is used to measure the linearity range of the absorbance.

The linearity test is similar to the accuracy and repeatability test, except:
During the linearity test, all reagents are measured for only one wavelength.
In linearity test different items are calculated, such as blank correction,
theoretical value, etc.
9.3.3.3 Summary
The absorbance range with relative deviation less than 5 is the linearity range.
9.3.4 Absorbance Accuracy and Precision of Diluted Sample

This test is used to determine the accuracy and precision of absorbance of diluted
samples.

1. Prepare samples and diluent. If you want to compare the
automatically-diluted sample with that diluted manually, be sure to prepare
manually-diluted solution.
2. Set up the sample position and sample volume.
3. Set up the dilution ration and diluent position(D. Pos).
4. In case of Manual dilute, you should set up the reagent position for manual
dilution(Diluted Pos.).
5. Select Start to start the auto dilute test.
The system first washes N(replicates) reaction cuvettes, then the reagent
probe dispenses diluent and the sample probe dispenses sample. In
the defined start period, the system starts photometric measurement
and takes the absorbance readings.
If Manual dilute is selected, the system starts measuring the absorbance of
manually-diluted sample once auto diluted sample is analyzed. The
system again washes N(replicates) reaction cuvettes, then the reagent

probe dispenses manually-diluted solution. In the defined start period,
the system starts photometric measurement and takes the absorbance
readings of the solution.
When all measurements are finished, the system displays all absorbance
values of the auto-/manually-diluted solution, and calculates the
accuracy and precision of absorbance for auto-diluted sample.
9.3.5 Residue of Cuvette

This test is used to determine the amount of remained water in cuvette that is
washed automatically.

1. Prepare a solution for test.
2. Set up the options on the Residue of cuvette screen in the same way as
the above-mentioned tests.
3. Select Start. The system first measures the absorbance of the solution, and
washes the used cuvette, and then measure again the absorbance of the
solution.
For Auto sampling, the solution will be added automatically.

For Manual sampling, you should add the solution manually.
9.3.6 Sampling Accuracy and Precision of Sample Probe

Sampling accuracy means the deviation between the dispensed volume by
probe(reagent probe/sample probe) and the specified volume. Sampling precision
means the deviation among multiple dispensing volumes by a probe.
9.3.7 Carryover of Sample Probe

This test is to determine in which degree the sample on outside of the sample probe
may contaminate the next sample.

1. Prepare two types of solution for test.
2. Set up the Void Times. Void Times means the number of times that the
sample probe aspirates nothing among the two types of solution.
3. Select Start. The system will remind you to add the two types of solution,
and then measure the absorbance of the solution after the sample probe
aspirates nothing for specified N(Void Times) times.

9.3.8 Backwater
This test is to determine how much water remains on outside of the probes and
mixers that have been washed automatically.
9.3.8.2 Operation
1. Prepare a solution for test.
2. Set up the Void Times, which means the times that the probe/mixer
aspirates nothing in each reaction cuvette.
3. Select a probe or mixer.
4. Select a dilution mode.
Continuous Dilute: The probe or mixer continues with next void aspirating
and cleaning after the previous one.
Dilute<->Reaction disk rotates: An instruction is executed between two

void aspirating.
9.3.9 Stability and Drift of Absorbance
On the Stability/Drift screen absorbance range and drift can be calculated by
reading an existing photoelectric data file, and the system shows the test results
for each cuvette and enables you to learn whether the results are within specified
range or not.

1. Run a test for 90 replicates on the operation software, and then copy the folder
(named by the current date) of CURVEDATA that includes 90 .CDT files to the
CURVEDATA folder of the test and maintenance software.
2. Log in the test and maintenance software; select the Performance tab; select
Stability/Drift; enter the sample ID, test No. and test date in the following fields.
3. Select the Load button. If the test data of the specified date is loaded
successfully, a prompt will pop up to indicate the successful loading.
If the test data is lost, you will be prompted to check for 90 complete test data.
4. Enter the period range to calculate the absorbance difference during

maximum reaction time.

5. Select the Calculate button .When the calculation is finished, you will see a
couple of EXCEL files in the directory of the test and maintenance software.
These EXCEL files records various data of each cuvette, such as absorbance,
photoelectric data, absorbance drift, etc. All of the EXCEL files are named in
the format of year+month+day+hour+minute+second+sample ID+test No..
6. Enter the judging criteria in the fields as shown below.
7. Select the Result button. The list on the left side of the screen will show the
cuvettes that do not meet the criteria.
8. Select the View Graph button to review the reaction curves associated with the
test data.

The curve graph at the top left corner indicates the absorbance difference within
maximum reaction time at 340nm; the curve graph at the top right corner
indicates the absorbance difference between the primary and secondary
wavelength within maximum reaction time; the curve graph at the bottom
indicates the absorbance drift.
9.4 Parameter
Select the Parameter from the main screen. The Parameter screen is displayed.
You can inquire and configure the parameters of the main unit and subunits. For the
probe/disk/mixer units you are allowed to set up the motor speeds. See the figure
below.
Figure 9-9 Parameter screen
9.4.1 Detailed Operations

Inquire
1. Select a target unit. To inquire parameters of a unit, select one from the
drop-down list box next to Unit. To inquire parameters of a motor, select one
from the drop-down list box next to Motion. Repeat step 1 for the following
operations.(Note: If you select both a unit and a motor, the system will
identify the lastly-selected one.)
2. Select Inquire.
Configure/Configure All
1. Inquire or read the parameters of selected unit/motor.
2. Modify the parameter value.
3. Select Config. To configure the parameter of the modified line, or select

Config. All to configure all parameters of the selected unit/motor.

Save
1. Inquire or read the parameters of selected unit/motor.
2. Select Save to save the parameters.
Read
1. Select a target unit.
2. Select Read, then select a parameter file in the popup dialog box. If you
select a parameter file of a unit other than the target one, the latter will be
replaced by the unit specified in the parameter file.
Default
This button is similar to Save, except that when selecting Default you must not
select a target file, and the parameters will be saved in the directory where the test
and maintenance software locates.
Restore
This button is similar to Read, except that when selecting Restore you must not
select a target file, and the system will read the target file from the directory
where the test and maintenance software locates.

10 Troubleshooting
This chapter provides the system warning messages and recommended corrective
actions, which should be taken in time once any error occurs.
When an error or failure occurs, relevant alarm message will be displayed, and the
system will take corresponding actions.
The alarm message will be displayed in the alarm message area of the software
screen, and then recorded in the system log automatically.
The logs will record the time, level, code and detailed information of each warning to
help user record and search errors.
In case of a warning message, check its error code on the Logs screen of the
operating software, and find recommended actions in the Solution field.
10.1 Classification of Error Messages

On the system, the error messages are divided into different types according to their
severity.
Severity: Warning
Level Description Actions taken by the system

0 Errors to warn user The system will warn the user of the errors
like calibration calculation failure. However,
the system running and test result will not be
affected.
Severity: Invalidating tests
10 Troubleshooting 10-1
1 Errors to invalidate The system will invalidate the current test,
tests and run it again if configured. If the error
occurs for consecutive 2 times on the same
test, the system will not rerun such test.
2 Errors to invalidate The system will invalidate all tests in current
reagent batch that use the exact reagent.
3 Errors to invalidate The system will invalidate all tests of the
sample sample.
18 Errors to invalidate a When failure (such as sample collision)
instruction occurs during measurement, the system will
invalidate all tests associated with the
current instruction and rerun the tests.
Severity: Pausing

4 Errors to pause R1 The system will stop the sampling of R1 for
probe remaining tests and pause after finishing the
tests whose R1 has been dispensed.
5 Errors to pause R2 The system will stop the sampling of R2 for
probe remaining tests and pause after finishing the
tests whose R2 has been dispensed.
6 Errors to pause The system will invalidate all in-progress
sample probe tests whose sample is not dispensed and
forbid new tests. When other tests whose
sampling is done are finished, the system
will pause and wait for servicing.
7 Errors to pause The system will stop dispensing R1 without
reagent disk influencing sampling and other operations.
The system will continue the tests whose
reagent and sample is dispensed or whose
sample is not dispensed and invalidate
other tests. When the valid tests are
finished, the system will pause.
8 Errors to pause The system will invalidate the tests whose
sample mixer sample is not stirred and forbid new tests.
When the valid tests are finished, the
system will pause.
9 Errors to pause The system will invalidate the tests whose
reagent mixer reagent is not stirred and forbid new tests.
When the valid tests are finished, the
system will pause.
10 Errors to pause The system will stop dispensing R1 and
washing washing reaction cuvettes. When all valid
tests are finished, the system will pause.
Severity: Stopping analysis
10-2 10 Troubleshooting
11 Errors to stop The system will invalidate all unfinished
analysis in tests and pause.
emergency
12 Errors to forbid test When test conditions are not met at system
startup, analysis will be forbidden.
Severity: Forbidding

13 Errors to forbid LIS The system will invalidate sending results to
and downloading sample from the LIS host
and should be connected to LIS again.
14 Errors to forbid ISE When the ISE module is configured but
cannot work normally, the system will forbid
running ISE analytes.
15 Errors to forbid When the sample bar code reader is
sample bar code configured but cannot work normally, the
reader system will forbid scanning samples.
16 Errors to forbid When the reagent bar code reader is
reagent bar code configured but cannot work normally, the
reader system will forbid scanning reagents.
17 Errors to forbid fluidic The system will prohibit the washing
system function.
Severity: Shutting down

19 Errors to exit When startup check is not passed, the
system will remind user of exiting the
operating software.
10.2 Corrective Measures

When an error occurs, check the error code on the Logs page of the Utilities screen
and then find corresponding measures in the following tables.
WARNING
When troubleshooting the analyzer, first find out whether it is necessary
to switch off the Main Power or Analyzing Unit Power.
BIOHAZARD
10.2.1 Failures of Operation Unit
10.2.1.1 Operating System
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
C0001 19 Reinstall Windows
Operating Operating system is XP or Windows
system error not Windows XP/2000 2000 and the
operating software
C0002 19 Install a memory
Insufficient Memory is less than
above 128M and
memory 128M
reboot
C0003 19 Resolution Screen resolution is Set resolution to
error not 1024*768 1024*768
C0004 19 Set color to 65535
Color error Color is below 16 bits
and reboot
C0005 0 Rearrange hard
Insufficient Remaining disk space disk. Delete curves
disk space is less than 1G and other unuseful
files
C0006 19 Rearrange hard
Out of disk Remaining disk space disk. Delete curves
space is less than 200M and other unuseful
files
C0007 19 CPU
CPU is below Celeron
performance Replace PC or CPU
733
low
C0008 0 Check printer
Printer is not powered connection. Check if
Printer
on. Cable is not printer is powered
cannot be
connected. No driver is on, driver and
connected
installed default printer has
been installed
C0009 0 Check for paper
Printer Paper jam. No paper. jam. Check if printer
failure No ink is busy, and print
tasks are too many
C0010 0 No help document.
Help Check if help
Help document is
document document exists or
damaged. No memory
error is damaged
space
C0011 0 No sound card is
Reinstall sound
Sound card installed. Sound card
card or sound card
failure failure. Incorrect sound
driver
card driver
10.2.1.2 Equipment Connection
Code Message
C0101 12 Check serial port
connection. Replug
Serial cable is not cable. Check if
Equipment
connected. Analyzing analyzing unit is
cannot be
Unit Switch is powered on. Start
connected
powered off initialization again.
Restart PC and
analyzing unit
connection. Replug
cable. Check if
Serial port Sending buffer is full.
analyzing unit is
cannot send Serial port is not
powered on. Start
instruction initialized
initialization again.
Restart PC and
analyzing unit
connection. Replug
cable. Check if
Serial port Receiving buffer is
analyzing unit is
cannot full. Serial port is not
powered on. Start
receive data initialized
initialization again.
Restart PC and
analyzing unit
10.2.1.3 Calculation
Code Message
C0301 0 (%s Reagent blank
Replace reagent.
test)Calibratio absorbance is too
Replace calibrator.
n sensitivity high. Calibrator is
Recalibrate
error degenerated
C0302 0 (%s
test)Coefficien Calibrator goes Replace reagent.
t difference wrong. Reagent goes Replace calibrator.
limit is out of wrong Recalibrate
range
C0303 0 (%s
test)Correlatio
Calibrator goes Replace reagent.
n
wrong. Reagent goes Replace calibrator.
coefficient(R2
wrong Recalibrate
) is out of
range
C0304 0 (%s
Calibrator goes Replace reagent.
test)Reaction
wrong. Reagent goes Replace calibrator.
curve SD is
wrong Recalibrate
out of range
Code Message
C0305 0 (%s Results cannot be
Replace reagent.
test)Calibratio calculated by
Replace calibrator.
n parameters specified rule. Results
Recalibrate or
cannot be are abnormal.
recalculate calibration
calculated by Calibration is not
parameters
given method convergent
C0306 0 (%s
Reagent blank
test)Absorban Replace reagent.
absorbance is too
ce of 0 Replace calibrator.
high. Calibrator is
calibrator is Recalibrate
degenerated
out of range
C0307 0 (%s
Calibration replicates
test)Calibratio
are unfinished.
n data is Fill reagent and
Reagent is
incomplete. calibrator. Recalibrate
insufficient. Calibrator
Cannot
is insufficient
calculate
C0308 0 (%s test
and %d Key points are lost
sample)Resp during response Rerun
onse calculate calculation
error
C0309 0 (%s test Abnormal sample
and %d (hemolysis, etc).
Run diluted sample, or
sample)Resp Calibrator
recalibrate
onse is out of concentration is too
range low
C0310 0 If problem occurs
Communication
Received data frequently, reconnect
between analyzing
check sum serial cable. If problem
unit and operation
error remains, contact the
unit is interfered
developer
C0311 0 Control is
(%s
degenerated. Rerun. Replace control
test)Real-time
Reagent goes wrong. or reagent and rerun.
QC 12s
Light intensity is Replace light source
warning
abnormal
C0312 0 Control is
(%s
test)Real-time
QC of 13s is
out of control
abnormal
C0313 0 Control is
(%s
test)Real-time
QC of 22s is
out of control
abnormal
C0314 0 Control is
(%s
test)Real-time
QC R4s is out
of control
abnormal
C0315 0 Control is
(%s
test)Real-time
QC 41s is out
of control
abnormal
Code Message
C0316 0 Control is
(%s
test)Real-time
QC 10x is out
of control
abnormal
C0317 0 (%s
Calibrator goes
test)Calibratio Replace reagent or
wrong. Reagent goes
n repeatability calibrator. Recalibrate
wrong
is out of range
C0318 0 (%s
Incorrect reagent
test)Multi-poin
dispensing volume. Retest un-monotone
t or nonlinear
Incorrect calibrator points. Recalibrate
calibration is
dispensing volume.
not monotone
C0319 0 (%s)Result Abnormal test result. Rerun participated
cannot be Error occurs like 0 tests. Check and reset
calculated dividend calculation formula
C0320 0 (%d
sample/%s Response error.
test)Concentr Calibration formula Rerun or recalculate
ation cannot error
be calculated
C0321 0 Absorbance is Rerun, or rerun after
Sample goes wrong.
out of linearity replacing reagent or
Reagent goes wrong
range sample
C0322 0 (%s test Antigen excess. Too
and %d much sample.
Dilute and rerun
sample)Prozo Sample concentration
ne check error is too high.
C0323 0 (%s test
and %d
Reagent is stored too Rerun after replacing
sample)R1
long or expired reagent
blank exceeds
limit
C0324 0 (%s test
and %d
sample)No
Rerun, or rerun after
linear interval Unsteady reagent.
replacing reagent or
in Kinetic Sample goes wrong
sample
analysis.
Cannot
calculate
10.2.1.4 Sample Bar Code

Code Message
C0401 0 Released sample is Check sample tube for
Sample
not unloaded. barcode mis-applying.
barcode %s
Barcode label is in Reprint and reapply
already exists
wrong place barcode label
C0402 0 Barcode %s
Sample information Re-download or
has no
does not exist on LIS manually input request
corresponding
or is not downloaded information
request
Code Message
C0403 0 Rescan. Reprint and
Barcode %s Barcode scan error.
rescan barcode as
check error Bar code print error
configured
C0404 0 Reset barcode format,
%s barcode Barcode is in wrong
or reprint or rescan
error format
barcode
10.2.1.5 Reagent Bar Code

Code Message
C0501 0 Deleted reagent is not
Check reagent bottle for
Reagent unloaded. Barcode
barcode mis-applying.
barcode %s label is in wrong
Reprint and reapply
already exists place. Reagent is
barcode label
used repeatedly
C0502 0 Barcode %s
Reagent barcode is
includes Rescan this reagent
printed in wrong
invalid barcode, or reprint and
format. Barcode scan
reagent rescan as configured
error
information
C0503 0 Rescan. Reprint and
Barcode %s Barcode scan error.
rescan barcode as
check error Bar code print error
configured
C0504 0 Reset barcode format,
%s barcode Barcode is in wrong
or reprint or rescan
error format
barcode
10.2.1.6 LIS Communication

Code Message
C0601 13 Check LIS connection
LIS host Abnormal network and network cable.
cannot be connection. LIS does Check if LIS host and
connected not start LIS station can start
normally
Incorrect accidentally, send or
segment receive again. If
Communication
sequence. problem occurs
failure
Required frequently, consult
segment lost developer of LIS or
equipment
accidentally, send or
receive again. If
Required field Communication
problem occurs
lost failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
Code Message
receive again. If
Data type Communication
problem occurs
error failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
receive again. If
Field value is Communication
problem occurs
not found failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
receive again. If
Wrong Communication
problem occurs
message type failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
receive again. If
Wrong event Communication
problem occurs
No. failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
receive again. If
Wrong Communication
problem occurs
process ID failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
receive again. If
Wrong version Communication
problem occurs
No. failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
Unknown receive again. If
Communication
keyword problem occurs
failure
identity frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
Keyword receive again. If
Communication
identity problem occurs
failure
already exists frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
Code Message
receive again. If
Unknown Communication
problem occurs
error failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
C0613 0 Neglect. If problem
Your query
occurs frequently,
does not exist LIS failure
contact developer of
on LIS
LIS or equipment
C0614 13 Send and receive again
LIS host is
after a moment, or
busy. Cannot LIS failure
reconnect to LIS. Reset
respond
LIS
C0615 0 Check network
connection. If problem
LIS does not start.
LIS response occurs continuously for
Communication
is timed out 3 times, contact
failure
developer of LIS or
equipment
C0616 0 Check if LIS host works
normally. Reset LIS
host. If problem occurs
Application LIS host database
continuously for 3
record locked error
times, contact the LIS
manufacture or
equipment developer
10.2.1.7 Others
Code Message
C0701 2 All reagents in this
kind of bottles do not
Fill reagent of this test,
%s test has reach minimum limit.
or replace it with new
no enough %s All reagents of this
reagent
kind cannot be
detected
C0702 11 Check if equipment is
Analyzing unit is busy
Test period powered on. Restore
and cannot return
timed out. failure. Communicate
result, serial
Cannot with control software.
communication error,
continue Restart analyzing unit
or power failure
and operation unit
C0703 12 Retest dark current on
Utilities-->Daily Maint.
Dark current Excessive circuit
page. Adjust
is too high noise
photoelectric gain.
Contact your developer
C0704 12 Reset the main unit on
Analyzing unit Parameter
reset failed downloading failed
page
Code Message
C0705 11 Restore failure on
Analyzing unit
Sensor failure. page. Restart analyzing
failure cannot
Motor/Belt failure unit and operation unit.
recover
Contact equipment
developer
C0706 0 No floppy disk or U
Storage disk is inserted. Check if U disk or
device error. Insufficient disk floppy disk is inserted
Cannot export space. Floppy disk or or full. Check if storage
data U disk is locked or device is damaged
damaged
C0707 0 No floppy disk or U
disk is inserted. File
Storage Check if U disk or
does not exist. File
device error. floppy disk is inserted
error. File is
Cannot import or full. Check if storage
damaged. Floppy
data device is damaged
disk or U disk is
locked or damaged
C0708 0 Insufficient
Insufficient acid wash Add acid wash solution
acid wash
solution on reagent on specified position of
solution on
disk reagent disk
reagent disk
Insufficient alkaline Add alkaline wash
alkaline wash
wash solution on solution on specified
solution on
reagent disk position of reagent disk
reagent disk
Add distilled water on
distilled water Insufficient distilled
specified position of
on reagent water on reagent disk
reagent disk
disk
Insufficient acid wash Add acid wash solution
acid wash
solution on sample on specified position of
solution on
disk sample disk
sample disk
Insufficient alkaline Add alkaline wash
alkaline wash
wash solution on solution on specified
solution on
sample disk position of sample disk
sample disk
Add distilled water on
distilled water Insufficient distilled
specified position of
on sample water on sample disk
sample disk
disk
Code Message
C0714 12 Check if lamp is turned
on, and check the
cuvettes on
Page, then replace the
cuvettes marked by
Lamp aged. Lamp is colors. Check the lamp
Light intensity not turned on. Lamp on If failure remains,
is weak is loose. All cuvettes replace the lamp
are dirty Utilities-->Daily Maint.
Page. If light intensity
is not strong enough,
replace the lamp. If
failure still remains,
contact equipment
developer
C0715 0 Check if lamp is turned
on, and check the
cuvettes on
Page, then replace the
Cuvette is dirty. The cuvettes marked by
amount of water to colors. Check the lamp
Blank of
measure the six-th on If failure remains,
cuvette %s
phase water blank is replace the lamp
exceeds limit
not enough. Light Utilities-->Daily Maint.
intensity is too weak Page. If light intensity
is not strong enough,
replace the lamp. If
failure still remains,
contact equipment
developer
C0716 11 Received data is too
Received Contact equipment
much and exceeds
data overflow developer
buffer capacity
C0717 11 Sent data Instruction sending Contact equipment

overflow buffer is full developer
C0718 14 Calibrate the ISE
module when the
ISE test results are
system is paused or
not received in given
ISE test is idle. If problem occurs
time; ISE module is
timed out continuously for 3
not connected
times or other error
correctly
occurs, contact the
developer
Code Message
C0719 12 Check if lamp is
Lamp is not turned installed correctly and
on; bulb is damaged; turned on. If failure
no lamp is installed; remains after replacing
Lamp is not lamp is loose; the lamp, contact the
turned on foreign matter exist develop. Check if
in three continuous foreign matters exist in
cuvettes to obstruct continuous three
light path cuvettes. Replace the
cuvettes if necessary
C0720 12 No cuvettes are
Check if all positions
installed in four
No reaction of reaction disk are
continuous
cuvettes, or occupied. If yes, ask
positions;
lamp intensity our service personnel
photoelectric gain
is too strong to adjust the
exceeds the
photoelectric gain
measurement range
C0721 1 Check for failed
cuvette and replace it.
Foreign matters If the error remains,
Clots are
exist to obstruct light check if the lamp is
found in
path so that the installed tightly. If the
No.%s
measured value is error still remains for
cuvette
less than 1000 all new cuvettes,
contact our service
personnel
10.2.2 Failures of Analyzing Unit

10.2.2.1 Main Unit
Code Message
A0001 11 Restore failure on
Instruction format
Invalid error. Invalid
page. If this message
command information is
appears for 3 times,
included
contact the developer
A0002 12 Parameter Reset mechanically and
Parameter
downloading failed. retry. If this failure
download
Parameter occurs for 3 times,
error
configuration error contact the developer
A0003 11 Wait for 30-60s and
Downloading retry. If system does not
Main unit is
parameters to respond for long time,
busy
subunits. Cannot restore failure. If this
downloading
respond to other problem occurs
parameters
instruction frequently, contact the
developer
Code Message
Self-test error Self-test error page. If this message
A0005 11 Switch off analyzing unit
power and switch on
again. Restore failure
Invalid
Instruction execute on Utilities-->Daily
instruction in
error Maint. page. If this
current status
message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
System is
Executing other again. Restore failure
busy. Cannot
instruction. Cannot on Utilities-->Daily
respond to
respond to current Maint. page. If this
other
one message appears for 3
operation
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
Instruction Instruction execute on Utilities-->Daily
execute error error Maint. page. If this
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
E2PROM read/write on Utilities-->Daily
Memory error
times, contact the
developer
A0009 0 Received data in Rerun. If problem
Photoelectric
single period is less occurs frequently,
data is lost
than 90 contact the developer
A0010 11 If optic measurement
assembly goes wrong,
replace AD assembly. If
AD collection board
Photoelectric AD value is too low works normally,
output is (below 10) or too high remove optic
abnormal (over 65500) measurement
assembly, and check if
preamplification board
and optical path are
normal
A0011 11 Photoelectric
Photoelectric data
Restart analyzing unit
buffer is full. Cannot
data overflow and operation unit
process new data
A0012 11 Photoelectric circuit
Photoelectric
does not return result Restart analyzing unit
collection is
via FIFO in specified and operation unit
timed out
time
Code Message
A0013 11
Restart analyzing unit
Downloading Incompatible or and replace with new
failed wrong version version. If failed again,
A0014 11 Connection error. Restart analyzing unit

Handshake Analyzing unit is and shake hand. If
failed performing other failed for 3 times,
operation contact the developer
power and switch on
Execution again. Restore failure
result is not Instruction execution on Utilities-->Daily
received in is timed out Maint. page. If this
given time message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
No response,
or response
error
times, contact the
developer
10.2.2.2 Sample Probe Unit

Code Message
A0101 6 Reset analyzing unit
power and restart
Instruction format operating software.
Instruction error. Invalid Then retry this
format error information is instruction. If this
included message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
operating software.
Instruction Instruction parameter
Then retry this
parameter does not comply with
instruction. If this
error protocol
times, contact the
developer
Code Message
power and switch on
again. Download
Unit is busy. Unit parameters and restore
No execute
does not reset failure on
condition
mechanically Utilities-->Daily Maint.
A0104 6 Wrong Switch off analyzing unit
sensor power and switch on
status when again. Restore failure
sample Vertical position on Utilities-->Daily
probe sensor failure Maint. page. If this
moves message appears for 3
vertically(oth times, contact the
er position) developer
A0105 11 Wrong
Switch off analyzing unit
sensor
power and switch on
status when
sample
Vertical position on Utilities-->Daily
probe
sensor failure Maint. page. If this
moves
vertically(in
times, contact the
reaction
developer
disk)
A0106 6 Sample
probe
cannot find
Vertical position
home Restore failure. If failed
sensor failure.
position for 3 times, contact the
Obstruction exists in
when developer
vertical direction
moving
vertically(oth
er position)
A0107 6 Sample
probe
cannot find
home Vertical position
Restore failure. If failed
position sensor failure.
for 3 times, contact the
when Obstruction exists in
developer
moving vertical direction
vertically(in
reaction
disk)
A0108 18 Sample
probe
If auto reset fails,
bumps when Wrong position.
restore failure. Remove
moving Obstruction exists
obstruction and reset
vertically(oth
er position)
A0109 18 Sample
probe
bumps when Wrong position.
vertically(IS
E unit)
Code Message
A0110 18 Sample
probe
bumps when If auto reset fails,
Wrong position.
moving restore failure. Remove
Obstruction exists
vertically(in obstruction and reset
reaction
disk)
A0111 6 Lowering
down at Sample probe is not
current in vertical home
restore failure. If failed
position is position. Current
not position is not proper
developer
allowed(oth for lowering down
er position)
A0112 11 Lowering
down at
Sample probe is not
current If auto reset fails,
in vertical home
position is restore failure. If failed
position. Current
not for 3 times, contact the
position is not proper
allowed(in developer
for lowering down
reaction
disk)
A0113 6 Wrong
sensor
power and switch on
status when
sample
Rotational position on Utilities-->Daily
probe
moves
horizontally(
times, contact the
other
developer
position)
sample Rotational position on Utilities-->Daily
probe sensor failure Maint. page. If this
moves message appears for 3
horizontally( times, contact the
ISE unit) developer
A0115 11 Wrong
sensor
power and switch on
status when
sample
Rotational position on Utilities-->Daily
probe
moves
horizontally(i
times, contact the
n reaction
developer
disk)
Code Message
A0116 6 Sample
probe
cannot find
home Rotational position
developer
moving horizontal direction
horizontally(
other
position)
A0117 11 Sample
probe
cannot find
home Rotational position
developer
moving horizontal direction
horizontally(i
n reaction
disk)
A0118 18 Sample
probe
collides Sample probe is
when obstructed or falls
restore failure. Check
moving when moving
motor and belt
horizontally( horizontally.
other
position)
A0119 11 Sample
probe
collides Sample probe is
when obstructed or falls
restore failure. Check
moving when moving
motor and belt
horizontally(i horizontally.
n reaction
disk)
A0120 6 Sample probe is not
Rotating at
in horizontal home If auto reset fails,
current
position. Current restore failure. If failed
height is not
height is not proper for 3 times, contact the
allowed(oth
for rotation(highest developer
er position)
position)
A0121 11 Rotating at Sample probe is not
current in horizontal home If auto reset fails,
height is not position. Current restore failure. If failed
allowed(in height is not proper for 3 times, contact the
reaction for rotation(highest developer
disk) position)
A0122 6 If auto reset fails,
Syringe
sensor is in Syringe sensor error
wrong status
developer
Code Message
A0123 6 Check if sample syringe
reaches maximum limit
Sample syringe
Syringe and cannot restore.
reaches maximum
cannot find Restore failure, or reset
stroke. Cannot
home after pushing syringe to
restore or dispense
position home position. If failed
sample
developer
A0124 3 Clog Wash sample probe.
Sample probe is
detection Remove probe and
clogged
error clear up foreign matters
A0125 11 Sample
probe does
not detect
No deionized water Add deionized water
wash
solution
level
A0126 1 Sample
probe does
not detect No R1 dispensed. Check if reagent is
liquid level Insufficient R1 sufficient. Rerun
on reaction
disk
A0127 3 Sample
probe does
No sample tube.
not detect Check if sample is
Sample is already
liquid level sufficient. Rerun
depleted
on sample
disk
A0128 1 Insufficient
sample Insufficient sample Check sample volume
dispensing aspiration volume and rerun
volume
A0129 1 Sample
Sample syringe Restore failure. If failed
syringe
aspirates full for 3 times, contact the
aspirates
abnormally developer
too much
A0130 1 Sample
Sample syringe Restore failure. If failed
syringe
dispenses empty for 3 times, contact the
dispenses
abnormally developer
too much
A0131 1 Sample
Add samples or replace
probe does Insufficient sample.
with standard sample
not aspirate Wrong tube type
tube
sample
A0132 0 Re-centrifugate sample,
Clogs in
Clots in sample or remove clots
sample
manually
power and switch on
times, contact the
developer
Code Message
power and switch on
No again. Restore failure
response, or Instruction execute on Utilities-->Daily
response error Maint. page. If this
error message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
10.2.2.3 Sample Disk Unit

Code Message
power and restart
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
operating software.
Then retry this
error protocol
times, contact the
developer
A0203 6 Switch off analyzing
unit power and switch
on again. Download
Unit is busy and does parameters and restore
No execute
not reset failure on
condition
Home Utilities-->Daily Maint.
Cannot find home
position is not page. If this message
position
found appears for 3 times,
Step missed Belt failure page. If this message
Wrong sensor
Sensor failure page. If this message
status
Code Message
A0207 15 Sample barcode
Bar code
reader is not installed. Reboot the analyzer. If
reader does
Barcode reader is not problem remains,
not work
connected to PCB contact the developer
normally
properly
A0208 0 Check if barcode label
Barcode digit error. is dirty, skewed, or
Bar code
Data format error. No placed correctly.
error
end mark Rescan or scan after
reprinting
A0209 15 Rescan after restoring
Bar code
Scanning too many or failure. If this message
sending
too fast appears for 3 times,
buffer is full
Execution on again. Restore
result is not Instruction execution failure on
received in is timed out Utilities-->Daily Maint.
given time page. If this message
on again. Restore
No response,
Instruction execute failure on
or response
error Utilities-->Daily Maint.
error
10.2.2.4 R1 Probe Unit

Code Message
power and restart
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
operating software.
Then retry this
error protocol
times, contact the
developer
Code Message
power and switch on
again. Download
No execute
condition
Wrong sensor power and switch on
R1 probe Vertical position on Utilities-->Daily
moves sensor failure Maint. page. If this
vertically(othe message appears for 3
r position) times, contact the
developer
vertically(in message appears for 3
reaction disk) times, contact the
developer
A0306 4 R1 probe
cannot find Vertical position
home position sensor failure.
when moving Obstruction exists in
developer
vertically(othe vertical direction
r position)
A0307 11 R1 probe
cannot find Vertical position
developer
vertically(in vertical direction
reaction disk)
A0308 18 R1 probe
Wrong position.
Obstruction exists
vertically(othe obstruction and reset
r position)
A0309 18 R1 probe
Wrong position.
Obstruction exists
reaction disk)
A0310 4 Lowering
R1 probe is not in
down at If auto reset fails,
vertical home
current restore failure. If failed
position. Current
position is not for 3 times, contact the
allowed(other developer
for lowering down
position)
Code Message
A0311 11 Lowering
R1 probe is not in
down at If auto reset fails,
vertical home
current restore failure. If failed
position. Current
position is not for 3 times, contact the
for lowering down
reaction disk)
R1 probe Rotational position on Utilities-->Daily
horizontally(ot message appears for 3
her position) times, contact the
developer
Wrong sensor
power and switch on
status when
R1 probe Rotational position
on Utilities-->Daily
moves sensor failure
Maint. If this message
horizontally(in
reaction disk)
A0314 4 R1 probe
cannot find Rotational position
developer
horizontally(ot horizontal direction
her position)
A0315 11 R1 probe
cannot find Rotational position
developer
horizontally(in horizontal direction
reaction disk)
A0316 18 R1 probe
R1 probe is
collides when If auto reset fails,
obstructed or falls
moving restore failure. Check
when moving
horizontally(ot motor and belt
horizontally
her position)
A0317 11 R1 probe
R1 probe is
collides when If auto reset fails,
obstructed or falls
when moving
horizontally(in motor and belt
horizontally
reaction disk)
A0318 4 R1 probe is not in
horizontal home If auto reset fails,
Rotating is not
allowed(other
position)
position)
Rotating is not
allowed(in
reaction disk)
position)
Code Message
Syringe
sensor is in Syringe sensor error
wrong status
developer
A0321 4 Check if R1 syringe
and cannot restore.
R1 syringe reaches
Syringe Restore failure, or reset
maximum stroke.
cannot find after pushing syringe to
Cannot restore or
home position home position. If this
dispense reagent
problem occurs for 3
times, contact the
developer
A0322 11 R1 probe
does not
No deionized water Add deionized water
detect wash
solution level
A0323 1 R1 probe No R1 or sample or
does not insufficient R1 in
Check if reagent is
detect liquid reaction cuvette when
sufficient. Rerun
level on system dispenses R1
reaction disk or R3
A0324 2 R1 probe
does not No reagent on first
Check if reagent is
detect liquid reagent position.
sufficient. Rerun
level on Reagent is depleted
reagent disk
A0325 1 Insufficient R1
Insufficient R1 Check reagent volume
dispensing
aspiration volume and rerun
volume
A0326 1 R1 syringe Restore failure. If failed
R1 syringe aspirates
aspirates too for 3 times, contact the
full abnormally
much developer
R1 syringe dispenses
dispenses too for 3 times, contact the
empty abnormally
much developer
power and switch on
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
No response,
or response
error
times, contact the
developer
10.2.2.5 R2 Probe Unit
Code Message
power and restart
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
operating software.
Then retry this
error protocol
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
again. Download
No execute
condition
Wrong
power and switch on
sensor
status when
Vertical position on Utilities-->Daily
R2 probe
moves
vertically(ot
times, contact the
her position)
developer
vertically(in message appears for 3
reaction times, contact the
disk) developer
A0406 5 R2 probe
cannot find
home Vertical position
developer
moving vertical direction
vertically(ot
her position)
Code Message
A0407 11 R2 probe
cannot find
home
Vertical position
position Restore failure. If failed
sensor failure.
when for 3 times, contact the
moving developer
vertical direction
vertically(in
reaction
disk)
A0408 18 R2 probe
bumps
when Wrong position.
vertically(ot
her position)
A0409 18 R2 probe
bumps
when If auto reset fails,
Wrong position.
Obstruction exists
reaction
disk)
A0410 5 Lowering
down at R2 probe is not in
current vertical home
position is position. Current
not position is not proper
developer
allowed(oth for lowering down
er position)
A0411 11 Lowering
down at
R2 probe is not in
current If auto reset fails,
vertical home
position is restore failure. If failed
position. Current
not for 3 times, contact the
for lowering down
reaction
disk)
horizontally( message appears for 3
other times, contact the
position) developer
horizontally( message appears for 3
in reaction times, contact the
disk) developer
Code Message
A0414 5 R2 probe
cannot find
home
Rotational position
sensor failure.
moving developer
horizontal direction
horizontally(
other
position)
A0415 11 R2 probe
cannot find
home
Rotational position
sensor failure.
moving developer
horizontal direction
horizontally(
in reaction
disk)
A0416 18 R2 probe
collides
R2 probe is
obstructed or falls
when moving
horizontally( motor and belt
horizontally
other
position)
A0417 11 R2 probe
collides
R2 probe is
obstructed or falls
when moving
horizontally( motor and belt
horizontally
in reaction
disk)
Rotating is horizontal home If auto reset fails,
not position. Current restore failure. If failed
allowed(oth height is not proper for 3 times, contact the
er position) for rotation(highest developer
position)
Rotating is
not
allowed(in
reaction
disk)
position)
A0420 5 Syringe If auto reset fails,
sensor is in restore failure. If failed
Syringe sensor error
wrong for 3 times, contact the
status developer
A0421 5 Check if R2 syringe
and cannot restore.
Syringe R2 syringe reaches
Restore failure, or reset
cannot find maximum stroke.
after pushing syringe to
home Cannot restore or
home position. If this
position dispense reagent
problem occurs for 3
times, contact the
developer
Code Message
A0422 11 R2 probe
does not
detect wash No deionized water Add deionized water
solution
level
A0423 1 R2 probe
does not
No R1 or sample or
detect liquid Check if reagent is
insufficient R1 in
level on sufficient. Rerun
cuvette
reaction
disk
A0424 2 R2 probe
No reagent on
does not
second reagent Check if reagent is
detect liquid
position. Reagent is sufficient. Rerun
level on
depleted
reagent disk
A0425 1 Insufficient
R2 Insufficient R2 Check reagent volume
dispensing aspiration volume and rerun
volume
R2 syringe aspirates
aspirates for 3 times, contact the
full abnormally
too much developer
R2 syringe dispenses
dispenses for 3 times, contact the
empty abnormally
too much developer
power and switch on
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
response, Instruction execute on Utilities-->Daily
or response error Maint. page. If this
times, contact the
developer
10.2.2.6 Reagent Disk Unit

Code Message
power and restart
times, contact the
developer
Code Message
power and restart
operating software.
Then retry this
error protocol
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
again. Download
No execute
condition
A0504 7 Restore failure. If this
Home
Cannot find home message appears for 3
position is
position times, contact the
not found
developer
Step message appears for 3
Belt failure
missed times, contact the
developer
Wrong
sensor Sensor failure
times, contact the
status
developer
A0507 16 Reagent barcode
Bar code
reader is not installed. Reboot the analyzer. If
reader does
Barcode reader is not problem remains,
not work
connected to PCB contact the developer
normally
properly
A0508 0 Check if barcode label
Barcode digit error. is dirty, skewed, or
Bar code
Data format error. No placed correctly.
error
end mark Rescan or scan after
reprinting
A0509 16 Rescan after resetting
Bar code mechanically. If this
Scanning too many or
sending message appears for 3
too fast
buffer is full times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
times, contact the
developer
Code Message
power and switch on
response, Instruction execute on Utilities-->Daily
or response error Maint. page. If this
times, contact the
developer
10.2.2.7 Reaction Disk Unit

Code Message
power and restart
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
operating software.
Then retry this
error protocol
times, contact the
developer
on again. Download
No execute
condition
A0604 11 Reaction Reaction disk home Restore failure. If this
disk cannot position sensor message appears for 3
find home failure. Coder goes times, contact the
position wrong developer
A0605 11 Reaction
Restore failure. If this
disk missed
Motor failure. Belt message appears for 3
step when
failure times, contact the
moving
developer
horizontally
A0606 11 Reaction Restore failure. If this
disk sensor message appears for 3
Sensor failure
is in wrong times, contact the
status developer
A0608 12 No cuvette on a Load the cuvette or
Light signal specified position or contact the developer
too strong photoelectric gain and adjust
adjusting error photoelectric gain
Photoelectric Photoelectric buffer
on again. If this
buffer is overflow, or FIFO
abnormal overflow
times, contact the
developer
A0610 1 After testing, switch off
analyzing unit power
Photoelectric
Photoelectric and switch on again. If
collection and
data error this message appears
conversion failed
developer
Execution on again. Restore
result is not Instruction execution failure on
received in is timed out Utilities-->Daily Maint.
No on again. Restore
response, or Instruction execute failure on
response error Utilities-->Daily Maint.
error page. If this message
10.2.2.8 Reagent Mixer Unit

Error Level Error Message Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code
power and restart
included message appears
for 3 times, contact
the developer
power and restart
Instruction operating software.
Instruction parameter does Then retry this
parameter error not comply with instruction. If this
protocol message appears
the developer
Code
unit power and
switch on again.
Download
Unit is busy and parameters and
No execute
does not reset restore failure on
condition
mechanically Utilities-->Daily
Maint. page. If this
message appears
the developer
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
reagent mixer Vertical position
Utilities-->Daily
vertically(other
message appears
position)
the developer
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
reagent mixer Vertical position
Utilities-->Daily
vertically(in
message appears
reaction disk)
the developer
A0706 9 Reagent mixer
cannot find home Vertical position Restore failure. If
position when sensor failure. failed for 3 times,
moving Obstruction exists contact the
vertically(other in vertical direction developer
position)
vertically(in in vertical direction developer
reaction disk)
A0708 9 Reagent mixer is
Lowering down If auto reset fails,
not in vertical
at current restore failure. If
home position.
position is not failed for 3 times,
Current position is
allowed(other contact the
not proper for
position) developer
lowering down
not in vertical
home position.
Current position is
allowed(in contact the
not proper for
reaction disk) developer
lowering down
Code
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
reagent mixer Rotational position
Utilities-->Daily
horizontally(other
message appears
position)
the developer
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
reagent mixer Rotational position
Utilities-->Daily
horizontally(in
message appears
reaction disk)
the developer
Rotational position
cannot find home Restore failure. If
sensor failure.
position when failed for 3 times,
Obstruction exists
moving contact the
in horizontal
horizontally(other developer
direction
position)
Rotational position
sensor failure.
Obstruction exists
moving contact the
in horizontal
horizontally(in developer
direction
reaction disk)
not in horizontal If auto reset fails,
Rotating at
home position. restore failure. If
current height is
Current height is failed for 3 times,
not allowed(other
not proper for contact the
position)
rotation(highest developer
position)
Rotating at
current height is
not allowed(in
reaction disk)
position)
unit power and
switch on again.
Execution result Instruction Restore failure on
is not received in execution is timed Utilities-->Daily
given time out Maint. page. If this
message appears
the developer
Code
unit power and
switch on again.
Restore failure on
No response, or Instruction execute
Utilities-->Daily
response error error
message appears
the developer
10.2.2.9 Sample Mixer Unit

Code
power and restart
included message appears
the developer
power and restart
Instruction operating software.
Instruction parameter does not Then retry this
parameter error comply with instruction. If this
protocol message appears
the developer
unit power and
switch on again.
Download
Unit is busy and parameters and
No execute
does not reset restore failure on
condition
mechanically Utilities-->Daily
message appears
the developer
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
sample mixer Vertical position
Utilities-->Daily
vertically(other
message appears
position)
the developer
Code
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
sample mixer Vertical position
Utilities-->Daily
vertically(in
message appears
reaction disk)
the developer
A0806 8 Sample mixer
vertically(other in vertical direction developer
position)
vertically(in in vertical direction developer
reaction disk)
A0808 8 Sample mixer is
not in vertical home
position. Current
position is not
allowed(other contact the
proper for lowering
position) developer
down
not in vertical home
position. Current
position is not
allowed(in contact the
proper for lowering
reaction disk) developer
down
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
sample mixer Rotational position
Utilities-->Daily
horizontally(other
message appears
position)
the developer
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
sample mixer Rotational position
Utilities-->Daily
horizontally(in
message appears
reaction disk)
the developer
Code
Rotational position
sensor failure.
Obstruction exists
moving contact the
in horizontal
horizontally(other developer
direction
position)
Rotational position
sensor failure.
Obstruction exists
moving contact the
in horizontal
horizontally(in developer
direction
reaction disk)
Rotating at
current height is
not allowed(other
position)
position)
Rotating at
current height is
not allowed(in
reaction disk)
position)
unit power and
switch on again.
Execution result Instruction Restore failure on
is not received in execution is timed Utilities-->Daily
given time out Maint. page. If this
message appears
the developer
unit power and
switch on again.
Restore failure on
No response, or Instruction execute
Utilities-->Daily
response error error
message appears
the developer
10.2.2.10 Temperature Unit

Code Message
power and restart
times, contact the
developer
Code Message
power and restart
operating software.
Instruction Instruction
Then retry this
parameter parameter does not
error comply with protocol
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
Unit is busy. operating software.
No execute Instruction conflicts. Then retry this
condition Instruction buffer is instruction. If this
full message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
A0904 0 Reset hardware on
Reaction page and restart
Reaction disk
disk reaction disk
temperature
temperature temperature control. If
collection error
is too high this message appears
developer
page and restart
Wash Preheat
reaction disk
solution is temperature
temperature control. If
too hot collection error
this message appears
developer
Reaction page and restart
Reaction disk
disk reaction disk
temperature
collection error
is fluctuated this message appears
developer
Wash page and restart
Preheat
solution reaction disk
temperature
collection error
is fluctuated this message appears
developer
Reaction
page and restart
disk Reaction disk
reaction disk
temperature temperature
temperature control. If
control is collection error
this message appears
switched off
developer
Code Message
Preheat page and restart
Preheat
temperature reaction disk
temperature
control is temperature control. If
collection error
switched off this message appears
developer
Reaction
disk
Reaction disk page and restart
temperature
is not
collection error. temperature control. If
steady in
Heater control error this message appears
specified
time
developer
Wash
solution
Preheat page and restart
temperature
is not
collection error. temperature control. If
steady in
Heater control error this message appears
specified
time
developer
A0912 0 Refrigerator
Fan circuit failed. Contact equipment
fans are
Fan is damaged developer
abnormal
power and switch on
Execution
Instruction again. Restore failure on
result is not
execution is timed Utilities-->Daily Maint.
received in
out page. If this message
given time
power and switch on
No
again. Restore failure on
response, Instruction execute
or response error
error
A0915 0 Reaction
disk Reaction disk
temperature temperature sensor Contact equipment
sensor is is disconnected or developer
not damaged
connected
A0916 0 Preheat
Preheat
temperature
temperature sensor Contact equipment
sensor is
is disconnected or developer
not
damaged
connected
A0917 0 Pressure
Fan control circuit
machine Contact equipment
error, or fan is
fans developer
damaged
abnormal
10.2.2.11 Wash Unit
Code Message

power and restart
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
operating software.
Then retry this
error protocol
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
again. Download
No execute
condition
power and restart
operating software.
Instruction
Wash unit is busy or Then retry this
execution
abnormal instruction. If this
is timed out
times, contact the
developer
A1005 11 Wash unit If auto reset fails,
cannot restore failure. Remove
reach obstruction and reset. If
vertical direction
home problem remains,
position contact the developer
Wash unit
cannot Obstruction exists in
obstruction and reset. If
leave home vertical direction
problem remains,
position
A1007 11 Remove foreign
matters, and restore
Wash unit bumps. failure on
Wash unit
Obstruction exists. Utilities-->Daily Maint.
bumps
Mechanical failure page. If problem
remains, contact the
developer
Code Message
A1008 17 High-conce
Liquid level sensor is
ntration Empty
abnormal. Waste
waste high-concentration
buffer is not emptied
buffer is too waste buffer
in time
high
A1009 17 Low-conce
Liquid level sensor is
ntration Empty
abnormal. Waste
waste low-concentration waste
buffer is not emptied
buffer is too buffer
in time
high
A1010 17 Waste pump
abnormal. Liquid
Waste
sensor abnormal.
buffer level Troubleshoot failed part
External sewer
is too high
blocked. Tubing fell
off
A1011 17 Liquid sensor
abnormal. Inlet valve Troubleshoot failed part.
abnormal. Water Execute "System
Water tank
treatment system Prime" and select
level is too
abnormal. Water "Water
low
supply unit abnormal. Tank/Probes/Mixers
10psig pressure Prime"
abnormal
A1012 17 Liquid sensor
abnormal. Inlet valve
Water tank abnormal. Water
level is too treatment system Troubleshoot failed part
high abnormal. Water
supply unit abnormal.
Main filter abnormal
A1013 10 Valve abnormal. No Troubleshoot failed part.
Diluted diluted wash solution. Execute "System
wash tank Water tank level too Prime" and select
is too low low. Liquid level "Diluted Wash Solution
sensor abnormal Tank Prime"
A1014 0 Valve abnormal. No
Concentrat concentrated wash
Troubleshoot failed part.
ed wash solution. Water tank
Execute "Concentrated
tank is too level too low. Liquid
Wash Solution Refill"
low level sensor
abnormal
Pump/valv Utilities-->Daily Maint.
Pump failure. Valve
e goes page. If this message
failure
wrong appears for 3 times,
Code Message
A1016 12 Air pump/valve

abnormal. Container Identify failed part.
leakage. Vacuum Check if vacuum level is
Vacuum
filter/one-way valve normal by reading
pressure is
clogged. Connector pressure gauge on
abnormal
leakage. Water hydropneumatic
accumulation in assembly panel
vacuum container
abnormal. High
pressure protection of
Identify failed part.
pressure switch
Check if 25psig is
25psig started. Protection
normal by reading
pressure is valve abnormal.
pressure gauge on
abnormal Container leakage.
hydropneumatic
Oil
assembly panel
separator/one-way
valve clogged.
Connector leakage
abnormal. High
pressure switch
started. Protection
Check if 10psig is
10psig valve abnormal.
normal by reading
pressure is Container leakage.
pressure gauge on
abnormal Oil
hydropneumatic
separator/one-way
assembly panel
valve clogged.
Connector leakage.
Precision regulation
valve abnormal
abnormal. High
pressure switch
started. Protection
Check if 5psig is normal
5psig valve abnormal.
by reading pressure
pressure is Container leakage.
gauge on
abnormal Oil
hydropneumatic
separator/one-way
assembly panel
valve clogged.
Connector leakage.
Precision regulation
valve abnormal
A1020 12 Wash
Interior wash valve
solution
abnormal. Water tank
flow for
level too low. 10psig Troubleshoot failed part
probe
pressure abnormal.
interior is
Other valve abnormal
abnormal
Code Message
A1021 12 Wash
solution
flow for Exterior wash valve
Troubleshoot failed part
probe/bar abnormal
exterior is
abnormal
A1022 12 Wash
probe/tubing/check
Cuvette valve clogged.
Troubleshoot failed part
overflow Vacuum pressure
abnormal. Wash unit
abnormal
A1023 12 Wash probe clogged.
No wash Connector leakage.
solution is 10psig pressure
dispensed abnormal. Water tank Troubleshoot failed part
into level too low. Preheat
cuvettes module abnormal.
Loose connector
A1024 12 Tubing pressure not
released completely.
Air pump
High pressure Troubleshoot failed part
cannot start
protection of pressure
switch started
A1025 12 Dilution
Pressure of diluted
cannot
wash solution tank is
proceed Troubleshoot failed part
not released
successfull
completely
y
A1026 12 Water
accumulate Waste buffer level too
Troubleshoot failed part.
s in reagent high. Waste tubing
Arrange waste tubing
disk and clogged
wash well
A1027 0 Check the inlet tubing
Water tank
Water flow is weak, or connection. If error
cannot be
floater goes wrong remain, contact the
filled
developer
A1028 11 Pressure
Sensor is damaged
sensor Contact the developer
or disconnected
check error
A1029 11 Pressure
sensor Sensor goes wrong
Contact the developer
calibration during maintenance
error
Code Message

power and switch on
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
No
response,
or
response
error
times, contact the
developer
A1032 10 Diluted Valve goes wrong. No Troubleshoot failed part.
wash diluted wash solution. Execute "System
solution B Distilled water is not Prime" and select
is not enough. Liquid-level "Diluted Wash Solution
enough sensor goes wrong Tank Prime"
A1033 0 Valve goes wrong. No
Concentrat Troubleshoot failed part.
concentrated wash
ed wash Execute "System
solution. Distilled
solution B Prime" and select
water is not enough.
is not "Concentrated Wash
Liquid-level sensor
enough Solution Refill"
goes wrong
A1034 0 Shut down the analyzer.
High-conce High-concentration
Check and empty the
ntration waste is full, or
high-concentration
waste high-concentration
waste tank. If error
bucket is waste bucket sensor
remains, contact the
too high goes wrong
developer
A1035 17 Shut down the analyzer.
Vacuum
Liquid builds up in Empty the vacuum tank.
container is
vacuum container If error remains, contact
too high
the developer
A1036 12 Pressure of
Turn off air pump and
25psig
Air pump is blocked turn on again. If the
gauge is
and cannot work error remains, shut
less than
down the analyzer
1psig
25psig
gauge is Tubing are leaking or Shut down the analyzer
less than not connected and check the fluidic
20psig in properly tubing connection
standby
status
Code Message
Adjust the protection
25psign
Protection valve is valve to increase
gauge is
not adjusted correctly pressure to
within
25psig(0.172MPa)
27-35psig
A1039 12 Shut down the analyzer,
Pressure of
clean the tubing, check
25psign Protection valve and
the protection valve,
gauge is one-way valve are
pressure switch, power
greater blocked. Tubing is
supply and power cord.
than 35psig clogged or broken
Then start up the
at any time
analyzer
A1040 12 Vacuum
pressure is
greater
than
down the analyzer
-0.5psig
A1041 12 Vacuum
pressure is
greater Tubing are leaking or Shut down the analyzer
than not connected and check the fluidic
-10psig in properly tubing connection
standby
status
10psig
gauge is
less than
down the analyzer
1psig
10psig
standby
status
A1044 12 Pressure of Shut down the analyzer,
Inlet valve cannot be
10psign check the water supply
turned off. Water tank
gauge is and floater of water
overflow. Pressure
greater tank. Replace the inlet
too high
than 13psig valve if necessary
5psig
gauge is
less than
down the analyzer
1psig
5psig
standby
status
Code Message
A1047 12 Result
error:
Diluted
wash
Not enough pressure Contact the developer
solution
tank
emptying
failed
A1048 12 Result
error:
System
Tubing clogged Troubleshoot the tubing
pressure
releasing
failed
A1049 12 Result
error:
System
Tubing leaking Troubleshoot the tubing
pressure
establishin
g failed
A1050 12 Result
error:
Diluted
Pressure cannot
wash Restart the vacuum and
reach the expected
solution pressure gauges
value
tank
priming
failed
A1051 12 Result
error:
System
Tubing clogged Troubleshoot the tubing
vacuum
releasing
failed
A1052 12 Result
error:
System
Tubing leaking Troubleshoot the tubing
vacuum
establishin
g failed
A1053 12 Result
error:
10psig Troubleshoot the
Tubing leaking
pressure tubing
establishin
g failed
Code Message
A1054 12 Result
error:
5psig Troubleshoot the
Tubing leaking
pressure tubing
establishin
g failed
A1055 12 Result Air pump is blocked Shut down the air
error: and cannot work pump, and then restart
system it. If it is still abnormal,
pressure stop the instrument; if
and it is normal, continue to
vacuum do use it.
not restore
in
specified
time after
emptying
the
secondary
vacuum
container.
A1056 17 The liquid Low-concentration Check the
level of the waste overflows. low-concentration
internal waste outlet tubing.
waste
overflow
bucket is
too high.
Pump and valve
Execute failure
Emptying failure. Cannot turn
recovery. If it repeats
vacuum off air pump. Cannot
A1057 12 continuously for 5
container empty excessive
times, please contact
failed. moisture within 30
the developer
seconds
A1058 10 Concentrat Concentrated wash Troubleshoot failed
ed wash solution reagent part. Replace the
bottle bottle empty; concentrated wash
empty. pressure abnormal; reagent box and
tubing connection execute failure
error. recovery.
Sucking in SV14 failure; tubing Execute failure
concentrat leaking; air pump recovery. If it repeats
ed wash abnormal continuously for 5
A1059 12 failed due times, please contact
to the developer
insufficient
vacuum.
Code Message
Vacuum SV14 failure; tubing Execute failure

does not leaking; air pump recovery. If it repeats
restore in abnormal continuously for 5
specified times, please contact
A1060 12
time after the developer
sucking in
concentrat
ed wash
A1061 17 Air pump is Auto wash is Execute failure
off. Wash forbidden when air recovery. If it repeats
is forbiden. pump is off. Primary continuously for 5
vacuum container times, please contact
high level warning the developer
will turn off air pump
A1062 10 Concentrat Concentrated buffer Troubleshoot failed
ed wash bottle is empty; part. Execute failure
tank vacuum abnormal; recovery.
empty. pressure abnormal.
A1063 10 Diluted Valve abnormal. No Troubleshoot failed
wash tank diluted wash part. Execute failure
empty solution. Water tank recovery.
(Time level too low. Liquid
lapse 45 level sensor
seconds) abnormal. Pressure
abnormal
Primary Floater to highest Execute failure
vacuum level due to recovery. If it repeats
A1064 17 container excessive moisture continuously for 5
high level built up in primary times, please contact
warning vacuum container. the developer
10.2.2.12 ISE Unit

Code Message
A1101 14 ISE unit Reconnect. Reset ISE
ISE unit connection
handshake unit. Power on ISE unit
error
is abnormal again
A1102 14 Wait a moment, and
ISE unit is ISE unit is executing
re-execute ISE
busy other instruction
instruction
A1103 14 Power switched off. Reconnect to power.
Communication Reconnect serial cable.
ISE unit failed. Serial cable Perform ISE
does not damaged or initialization. Contact
respond unconnected. Module the developer to
connector damaged. replace board
Board elements
Code Message
damaged
A1104 14 Reinstall sensor.
Replace calibrant B and
Electrode installation
rerun, if still low, replace
incorrect. Calibrator
calibrant A and rerun.
expired. Electrode
Na+ Replace failed sensor
degenerated. Bubbles
electrode and rerun. Reinstall
in reference
slope is out electrode, eliminate
electrode. Reference
of standard bubbles and calibrate.
electrode damaged.
range Replace reference or
Electrodes interfered.
Na+ electrode and
Module or tubing
rerun. Monitor
temperature above 37
temperature, if too high,
relocate equipment
expired. Electrode
K+ Replace failed sensor
in reference
electrode damaged.
K+ electrode and rerun.
Module or tubing
Monitor temperature, if
too high, relocate
equipment
expired. Electrode
Cl- Replace failed sensor
in reference
electrode damaged.
Cl- electrode and rerun.
Module or tubing
too high, relocate
equipment
expired. Electrode
Li+ Replace failed sensor
in reference
electrode damaged.
Li+ electrode and rerun.
Module or tubing
too high, relocate
equipment
Code Message
A1108 14 Replace electrode and
Na+ Electrode rerun. Check for
electrode degenerated. Noise electrical noise. If board
noise error spike interference element is damaged,
replace the board
K+ Electrode rerun. Check for
replace the board
Cl- Electrode rerun. Check for
replace the board
Li+ Electrode rerun. Check for
replace the board
A1112 14 Replace reference
Reference electrode electrode and rerun.
Na+, K+,
degenerated. Check for electrical
Cl-, Li+
Environment noise. Check unit
electrodes
interfered by electrical grounding. If board
noise error
noise spike element is damaged,
replace the board
A1113 14 Replace failed
electrode and run.
Electrode Check calibrant A
Na+
degenerated. New channel and
electrode
electrode or new recalibrate. In case of
drift
calibrant A is used new electrode, drift may
occur, wait for 15
minutes and test again
electrode and run.
K+
electrode
drift
occur, wait for 15
Electrode electrode and run.
Cl- Check calibrant A
degenerated. New
electrode channel and
electrode or new
drift recalibrate. In case of
calibrant A is used
new electrode, drift may
occur, wait for 15
Code Message
electrode and run.
Li+
electrode
drift
occur, wait for 15
A1117 14 Replace reference
Reference electrode electrode and rerun.
Na+, K+, degenerated. Check for electrical
Cl-, Li+ Environmental noise. If board element
electrodes electric pulse. New is damaged, replace
drift electrode or new the board. Check
calibrant A is used calibrant A channel and
recalibrate
electrode and run.
Na+ Electrode Check calibrant A
electrode degenerated. New channel and
voltage electrode or new recalibrate. In case of
overflow calibrant A is used new electrode, drift may
occur, wait for 15
electrode and run.
K+ Electrode Check calibrant A
occur, wait for 15
electrode and run.
Cl- Electrode Check calibrant A
occur, wait for 15
electrode and run.
Li+ Electrode Check calibrant A
occur, wait for 15
A1122 14 Na+, K+, Reference electrode Replace reference
Cl-, Li+ degenerated. electrode and rerun.
electrodes Environmental Check for electrical
Code Message
voltage electric pulse. New noise. If board element
overflow electrode or new is damaged, replace
calibrant A is used the board. Check
calibrator A channel
and recalibrate
A1123 3 If sample is less than
Insufficient sample. 70l, increase sample
Sample not aspirated volume. Fill sufficient
Air in to measurement sample in tube. In case
sample chamber. Tubing of wrong electrode
aged. Pump tubing installation, install
clogged or too long again. Replace the
tubing
A1124 14 Check spring/sealing
ring. Ensure all
electrodes/O rings are
Calibrant A depleted. correct. Launch a wash
Tubing unconnected. procedure.
Calibrant A pump Disassemble the unit
failure. Tubing and reinstall sensor.
Air in clogged/cracked/bent. Replace bubble
calibrant A Fibrin and salt in detector, waste pump,
electrode tubing. or calibrant A and
Bubble detector recalibrate.
failure. Waste pump Reconnect/replace
failure tubing. Check electrical
connection. Replace
pump housing, motor,
or tubing
A1125 14 In case of wrong
electrode installation,
check spring and
sealing ring. Ensure all
Air in calibrant B. electrodes and O rings
Fibrin and salt in are installed correctly.
Air in electrode tubing. Press Clean on water
calibrant B Bubble detector treatment system to
failure. Waste pump wash. Disassemble this
failure unit and wash and
reinstall sensor.
Replace bubble
detector. Replace
waste pump.
A1126 14 In case of wrong
Air in calibrant B and electrode installation,
A. Fibrin and salt in check spring and
Air in electrode tubing. sealing ring. Ensure all
cleaner Bubble detector electrodes and O rings
failure. Waste pump are installed correctly.
failure Press Clean on water
treatment system to
wash. Disassemble this
Code Message
unit and wash and
reinstall sensor.
Replace bubble
detector. Replace
waste pump.
A1127 14 Calibrator A/B Replace reagent

No fluid in
depleted. No sample package. Check the
tubing
or cleaning solution tubing
A1128 14 Instruction Instruction format
Please contact the
execute error, or parameter
developer
error error
A1129 14 Calibrations ISE unit cannot store
Recalibrate
saving error calibration results
A1130 14 Bubble
Bubble detector is Replace the bubble
detector
damaged detector
failure
A1131 14
Calibrate repeatedly. If
problem remains,
Electrode slope is out
Calibration reinstall failed
of range during
failed electrode. If problem
calibration
still remains, replace
the electrode
A1132 14 If maintaining, send

instruction again, if
Instruction format testing, rerun.
Instruction
error. Parameter Otherwise restart
execute
error. No execute operation unit and
error
condition analyzing unit. If this
problem remains,
Execution on again. Reset
result is not Instruction execution mechanically on
received in is timed out Utilities-->Alignment
Code Message
No on again. Reset
response, Instruction execute mechanically on
or response error Utilities-->Alignment
error page. If this message
expired. Electrode
Na+ Replace failed sensor
in reference
electrode damaged.
Na+ electrode and
Module or tubing
rerun. Monitor
temperature, if too high,
relocate equipment
expired. Electrode
K+ Replace failed sensor
in reference
electrode damaged.
K+ electrode and rerun.
Module or tubing
too high, relocate
equipment
expired. Electrode
Cl- Replace failed sensor
in reference
electrode damaged.
Cl- electrode and rerun.
Module or tubing
too high, relocate
equipment
A1138 0 Electrode installation Reinstall sensor.
Li+
incorrect. Calibrator Replace calibrant B and
electrode
expired. Electrode rerun, if still low, replace
slope is out
degenerated. Bubbles calibrant A and rerun.
of standard
in reference Replace failed sensor
Code Message
range electrode. Reference and rerun. Reinstall
electrode damaged. electrode, eliminate
Electrodes interfered. bubbles and calibrate.
Module or tubing Replace reference or
temperature above 37 Li+ electrode and rerun.
too high, relocate
equipment
10.2.2.13 Others
Code Message
A1401 11 Undefined Generated error Upgrade the operating

failure code is out of software, or contact the
defined range service engineer
11 Calculation
Methods
11.1 Reaction Types

The system provides three reaction types for measurement:
Endpoint
Fixed-time
Kinetic
11.1.1 Endpoint
The endpoint or, more correctly, equilibrium method, is most ideal. The reaction
reaches equilibrium after a period of time. Since the equilibrium constant is very
large, it can be considered that all substrates (analytes) have changed into products,
and absorbance of the reaction liquid does not change any more. The absorbance
change is directly proportional to the analytes concentration.
The endpoint reaction is largely insensitive to minor changes in such condition

changes as amount of enzyme, pH value and temperature, provided the changes are
not significant enough to affect the reaction time.
11 Calculation Methods 11-1

11.1.1.1 Single-reagent
Figure 11-1 Single-reagent Endpoint Reaction Curve
As shown in Figure 11-1, R1 is the time when reagent is dispensed and S when
sample is dispensed. From L to M the reaction reaches equilibrium and the
absorbance reading is taken. The reagent blank is tested during N and P.
On the Basics window of the Test page, enter:

Reaction time: L and 14LM80 and M-4L
M
Reagent blank time: 1NP<13, P-4N or N=P=0 (one-point analysis)
N and P
To calculate reaction absorbance Ai,

If L=M Enter two Ms. One measuring point is applied. The
reaction absorbance is the absorbance at M, that is, Ai
AM.
If L=M-1 Enter M-1 and M. Two measuring points are applied.
The reaction absorbance is the average of absorbance
AM + AM 1
at M-1 and M, that is, Ai .
2
If L=M-2 Enter M-2 and M. Three measuring points are applied.
The reaction absorbance is the remaining one when the
maximum and minimum absorbance is removed.
If L=M-3 or L=M-4 Enter M-3 and M or M-4 and M. Four or five measuring
points are applied. The reaction absorbance is the
average of remaining absorbance when the maximum
and minimum ones are removed.
To calculate reagent blank absorbance Ab,

Follow the Ai calculation steps stated above.
Reaction response calculation: R = Ai k1 Ab or R = Ai ( reagent blank time is

0)
VR1
Where, k1 = is a volume correction factor for single-reagent analysis.
VR1 + VS
VR1 and VS are volumes of first reagent and sample. K1Ab is reagent blank
correction value.
11-2 11 Calculation Methods

Reagent blank absorbance can be subtracted from the reaction absorbance but
sample blank cannot. To correct the response with sample blank, you should request
sample blank separately, whose response is Rsb = Ai k1 Ab . The response after
being corrected by sample blank is R
'
= R RSb .
11.1.1.2 Double-reagent
Figure 11-2 Double-reagent Endpoint Reaction Curve
As shown in Figure 11-2, R1, S and R2 are the time when first reagent, sample and
second reagent are respectively dispensed. From L to M the reaction reaches
equilibrium and the absorbance reading is taken. The sample blank is tested during
N and P.

Reaction time: [L][M] 43 LM80 and M-4L
Reagent blank time: 14NP42, P-4N or N=P=0
[N][P]
To calculate reaction absorbance Ai, follow the relevant steps stated in

11.1.1.1 Single-reagent.
To calculate reagent blank absorbance Ab, follow the relevant steps stated in
Calculate the reaction response using the following equation:
R = Ai k2 Ab or R = Ai (reagent blank time is 0)

VR1 + VS
Where, K2Ab is sample blank correction value. k2 = is a volume
VR1 + VS + VR 2
correction factor for double-reagent analysis. VR1, VS and VR2 are volumes of first
reagent, sample and second reagent.

11.1.1.3 Triple- or Quadruple-reagent
Figure 11-3 Triple-reagent Endpoint Reaction Curve
Figure 11-4 Quadruple-reagent Endpoint Reaction Curve
As shown in Figure 11-3 and Figure 11-4, R1, S, R2, R3 and R4 are the time when
first reagent, sample, second reagent, third reagent and fourth reagent are
respectively dispensed. From L to M the reaction reaches equilibrium and the
absorbance reading is taken. The reagent blank is tested during N and P.

Reaction time: L and Triple-reagent analysis: 92LM170 and M-4L;
M
Quadruple-reagent analysis: 133LM170 and M-4L.
Reagent blank time: Triple-reagent analysis: 43NP90, P-4N or N=P=0;
N and P
Quadruple-reagent analysis: 92NP132, P-4N or
N=P=0.
To calculate reaction absorbance Ai, follow the relevant steps stated in 11.1.1.1
Single-reagent.
To calculate reagent blank absorbance Ab, follow the relevant steps stated in
Reaction response calculation:
Triple-reagent R = Ai k 3 Ab or R = Ai (reagent blank time is 0)
analysis
VR1 + VS + VR2
k3 = is a volume correction factor
VR1 + VS + VR2 + VR3
for triple-reagent analysis. VR1, VS, VR2 and VR3 are
volumes of first reagent, sample, second reagent and third
reagent.
Quadruple-reagent R = Ai k 4 Ab or R = Ai ( reagent blank time is 0)

analysis VR1 + VS + VR2 + VR3
k4 = is a volume
VR1 + VS + VR2 + VR3 + VR4
correction factor for quadruple-reagent analysis. VR1, VS,
VR2, VR3 and VR4 are volumes of first reagent, sample,
second reagent, third reagent and fourth reagent.
11.1.2 Fixed-time
For the fixed-time reaction method, namely, first-order kinetic method or initial rate
method, the reaction velocity (v) within a specific period, is directly proportional to the
substrate concentration [S], that is, v=k[S]. As the substrate is consumed
continuously, the reaction velocity becomes smaller and smaller, and so does the
absorbance change rate. It takes much time for such a reaction to reach equilibrium.
Theoretically, the absorbance reading can be taken at any time. The reaction can,
however, become steady only after a lag because it is complicated at the beginning
and there are miscellaneous reactions due to complex serum compositions.
For any first order reaction, the substrate concentration [S] at given time since
reaction starts is obtained by the following formula:
[S ] = [S 0 ] e kt .
Where,
[S0] - Initial substrate concentration

e - Base of the natural log
k - Velocity constant
The change in substrate concentration [S] over a fixed time interval, t1 to t 2 , is
related to [S0] by the following equation:
[ S ]
[ S 0] = kt1 kt 2
e e
That is, within a fixed time interval, the change in substrate concentration is directly
proportional to its initial concentration. This is the general property of first-order
reactions. Within this interval, absorbance change is directly proportional to the
analytes concentration.
The fixed-time method is available in single-interval and double-interval according to

input mode of measuring points. Sample blank, namely, the absorbance change at
two points within the incubation time, is subtracted from the reaction absorbance in
double-interval reaction.
Substrate depletion can be checked in fixed-time reaction, and corresponding flag

will be marked in case of substrate depletion.

11.1.2.1 Single-reagent
Figure 11-5 Single-reagent Fixed-time Reaction Curve
As shown in Figure 11-5, R1 is the time when first reagent is dispensed and S when
sample is dispensed. The absorbance readings are respectively taken at L and M.

Reaction time: L and 14 L<M 80;
M
Reagent blank time: Appear in grey and cannot be entered.
N and P

AM AL
R=
tM t L
11.1.2.2 Double-reagent
Figure 11-6 Double-reagent Fixed-time Reaction Curve
second reagent are respectively dispensed. The absorbance readings are
respectively taken at L and M. The reagent blank is tested at N and P.

Reaction time: L and M 43 L<M 80;
Single-interval fixed-time: Reagent blank N=P=0
[N][P]
Double-interval fixed-time: Reagent blank 14N<P42
[N][P]

Single-interval AM AL
fixed-time R= ;
tM tL
Double-interval AM AL A AN
fixed-time R= k2 P
tM tL tP tN
VR1 + VS
Where, k2 = is a volume correction factor for double-reagent
VR1 + VS + VR 2
analysis. VR1, VS and VR2 are volumes of first reagent, sample and second
reagent.
11.1.2.3 Triple- or Quadruple-reagent

Figure 11-7 Triple-reagent Fixed-time Reaction Curve
Figure 11-8 Quadruple-reagent Fixed-time Reaction Curve
respectively dispensed. The absorbance readings are respectively taken at L and M.
The reagent blank is tested during N and P
On the Basics window of the Test page

Triple-reagent analysis, enter:
Reaction time[L][M] 92L<M170
[N][P]
[N][P]
Quadruple analysis, enter:

Reaction time[L][M] 134L<M171
[N][P]
[N][P]

Triple-reagent analysis
For single-interval fixed-time, AM AL
R=
tM tL
For double-interval fixed-time, AM AL A AN
R= k3 P
tM tL tP tN
Quadruple-reagent analysis
For single-interval fixed-time, AM AL
R=
tM tL
For double-interval fixed-time AM AL A AN
reaction, R= k4 P
tM tL tP tN
VR1 + VS + VR2
Where, k3 = is a volume correction factor for
triple-reagent analysis. VR1, VS, VR2 and VR3 are volumes of first reagent,
sample, second reagent and third reagent.
k4 = is a volume correction factor for
VR1 + VS + VR2 + VR3 + VR4
quadruple-reagent analysis. VR1, VS, VR2, VR3 and VR4 are volumes of
first reagent, sample, second reagent, third reagent and fourth reagent.
11.1.3 Kinetic
For the kinetic method, namely, zero-order kinetic or continuous-monitoring method,
the reaction velocity is not related to substrate concentration and remains constant
during the reaction process. As a result, for a given wavelength, the absorbance of
the analytes changes evenly, and the change rate (A/min) is directly proportional to
the activity or concentration of the analytes. The kinetic method is usually used to
measure enzyme activity.
In fact, it is impossible for the substrate concentration to be high enough, and the
reaction will be no longer a zero-order reaction when the substrate is consumed to a
certain degree. Therefore, the theory only stands within certain period. In addition,
the reaction can become steady only after a certain period of time, because the
reaction is complicated at the beginning and there are miscellaneous reactions due
to complex serum compositions.
In Kinetic reaction, the concentration or activity is obtained according to absorbance

change among specified measuring points.
The Kinetic method is available in single-interval Kinetic and double-interval Kinetic

according to input mode of measuring points.

11.1.3.1 Calculation Flow of Kinetic Method
Figure 11-9 Calculation Flow in Kinetic Reaction
Determine linearity range
Calculate response with least

square method
Judge the linearity
11.1.3.2 Determination of Linearity Range

The absorbance linearity range should be determined based on the substrate
depletion limit.
You should determine the linearity range within the reaction time other than the
reagent blank period.
Figure 11-10 Linearity Range Determination of Kinetic Method (Increased

Reaction)

Figure 11-11 Linearity Range of Kinetic Method (Increased Reaction)
Figure 11-10 shows the linearity range determination process for increased reaction.
In decreased reaction, the in Figure 11-10 should be changed into .
The number of measuring points (N) in substrate limit should be counted.

If N>=3, The linearity range includes all measuring points from
reaction start point to substrate depletion point. Otherwise
NLN alarm message is displayed.
If N=0 or N=1, No calculation is performed and only alarm message is
displayed.
If N=2 or N=3, An alarm message is displayed. Two or three measuring
points are applied to calculate the reaction response.
11.1.3.3 Response Calculation
Single-reagent
Figure 11-12 Single-reagent Kinetic Reaction Curve
As shown in Figure 11-12, R1 is the time when first reagent is dispensed and S when
sample is dispensed. The absorbance readings are taken during L and M.

Reaction time: L and M 14L<M 80;

Reagent blank time: N Appear in grey and cannot be entered.
and P

R=ALM
is the absorbance change rate per minute (slope of reaction curve) during L and
M and calculated by the least squares method.
Double-reagent
Figure 11-13 Double-reagent Kinetic Reaction Curve
second reagent are respectively dispensed. The absorbance readings are taken
during L and M. The reagent blank is tested during N and P.

Reaction time: L and M 43LM80
[N][P]
[N][P]

R=ALMK2ANP
Triple- or Quadruple-reagent
Figure 11-14 Triple-reagent Kinetic Reaction Curve

Figure 11-15 Quadruple-reagent Kinetic Reaction Curve
respectively dispensed. The absorbance readings are taken during L and M. The
reagent blank is tested during N and P.
On the Basics window of the Test page,

Triple-reagent analysis, enter:
Reaction time: L and M 92L<M170;
[N][P]
[N][P]
Quadruple-reagent analysis, enter:
Reaction time: L and M 133L<M170;
[N][P]
[N][P]

Triple-reagent analysis
For single-interval Kinetic reaction, For single-interval Kinetic reaction,
For double-interval Kinetic reaction, For double-interval Kinetic reaction,
Quadruple-reagent analysis
For single-interval Kinetic reaction, For single-interval Kinetic reaction,
For double-interval Kinetic reaction, For double-interval Kinetic reaction,
11.1.3.4 Linearity Check
A f Ab
Linearity= 100 < Linearity Limit
Au ,v
Where, A f , Ab and Au ,v are the absorbance change rates at the beginning

and end of reaction, and of all measuring points. These three values are calculated
based on the number of measuring points within the linearity range.

When N>9, A f is the absorbance change rate of first 6
measuring points, Ab of last 6 measuring
points, and Au ,v of all measuring points.
When 4 N 8 , A f is the absorbance change rate of first 3
measuring points, Ab of last 3 measuring
points, and Au ,v of all measuring points.
When N 3 Linearity is not checked.
When Linearity is not checked.

A f Ab 0.006A/minute
or Au ,v 0.006A/minute,
11.1.3.5 Enzyme Linearity Range Extension

Figure 11-16 Enzyme Linearity Range Extension
During the high-activity enzyme test, the substrate may be depleted quickly and the
reaction curve will appear obviously nonlinear (a smooth curve). If measurement is
performed by the ordinary procedure, the No linear interval alarm will be triggered,
reminding user to rerun the test after diluting the sample. This will more or less bring
troubles to user.
The system provides the enzyme linearity range extension function, which is
introduced as follows:
When the number of measuring points(N) within the linearity range is less than 2, the
enzyme linearity range extension can be implemented.
The maximum reaction rate(Amax) is calculated based on all measuring points

which include that within the lag time and then considered as the response of the
sample. If less than 2 measuring points during the lag time experience substrate
depletion, no result will be calculated and ENC(No calculation interval) is flagged.
Amax is calculated as follows:

If the reaction start time is t1, reaction time is tL-tM, then t1-tL is the lag time. If the
valid measuring points(N<2) within tL-tM are too few to calculate the response, the
reaction rate can be calculated based on all measuring points during t1-tM using the
formula: A(Ai1-Ai)/ti1ti. (i1, 2M)The maximum A, namely Amax, is
taken as the response of the sample. Therefore, the enzyme linearity range is
extended via the lag time.
11.1.4 QC Rule
11.1.4.1 Westgard Multi-rule
Westgard multi-rule is shown below.
Symbol Explanation QC Conclusion

12S One control value exceeds 2 Warning
standard deviations.
13S One control value exceeds 3 Out-of-control (random
standard deviations. error, systematic error)
22S Two consecutive control values Out-of-control
for one level exceed 2 standard (systematic error)
deviations.
R4S The difference between two Out-of-control (random
consecutive control values error)
exceeds 4 standard deviations.
41S Four consecutive control values Out-of-control
for one level exceed 1 standard (systematic error)
deviation.
10X Ten consecutive control values Out-of-control
for one level lie on one side of the (systematic error)
mean.
Westgard multi-rule QC conclusion flow for single control is shown in Figure

7-10.
Figure 11-17 Westgard Multi-rule QC Conclusion Flow

For several controls, the conclusion logic is similar to the above condition, except
for multiple continuous QC data, which should be combined simultaneously.
11.1.4.2 Cumulative Sum Check

Regarding different requirements to the QC result, cumulative sum check usually
adopts three controlling methods, which are mainly used to monitor the
systematic error of the testing methods. Where, x - average value, SD -
standard deviation.
Controlling Methods Threshold (k) Limit(h)

CS-(1.0SD: 2.7SD) x 1.0SD 2.7SD
CS-(1.0SD: 3.0SD) x 1.0SD 3.0SD
CS-(0.5SD: 5.1SD) x 0.5SD 5.1SD
11.1.4.3 Twin-plot
In the system, Twin-plot, which has no detailed rules, is present only as a whole
chart to help you make a QC conclusion.
Figure 11-18 Twin-plot
+3SD
+2SD
-2SD
-3SD
-3SD -2SD Y +2SD +3SD
The chart can sensitively indicate the systematic errors and random errors.
11.2 Prozone Check

During reaction of antigen and antibody, the amount of generated insoluble
compound is closely related to the proportion between antigen and antibody. When
antigen and antibody is proportioned properly, maximum amount of insoluble
compound is generated, that is, least light is passed and absorbance is the highest.
Otherwise, amount of insoluble compound is reduced, more light is passed, and
absorbance is decreased. Therefore, very high concentration samples may produce
insoluble compound equivalent to low samples and thus an incorrect result can be
reported. The antigen-antibody dose reaction is shown in Figure11-19.

Prozone check is used for Endpoint analysis only.
Figure11-19 Antigen-antibody Dose Reaction Curve
11.2.1 Antigen Addition

Antigen excess can be tested by further addition of antigen. When enough
antibodies are provided, the antigen reacts with them in reaction medium and forms
into stable compound particles, thus producing dispersed light, which increases
dynamically with compound amount increased and reaction time extended (antibody
excess). If antibody keeps excess in specified period, it will continue to react with
further added antigen, and reaction will increase accordingly. If antigen is excess
before further addition, the reaction will decrease. The reaction curve for further
addition of antigen is shown in the figure below.
Figure11-20 Reaction Curve for Further Addition of Antigen
Enter the following prozone check parameters:
Measuring points: Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4;
Prozone limit: PC;
Absorbance low limit for prozone check: ABS

When Antigen is selected, first edit box of ABS field and the Q3/Q4 fields on the
Basics window of the Test page are not available.
170>q2102>q1Reaction end point. 102 is the last measuring point before

sample is added again.
Sample PCAq2-kAq1,
Where, k is the volume correction factor.
For single-reagent test: k(VR1+VS)/(VR1+2VS);
For double-reagent test: k(VR1+VS+VR2)/( VR1+2VS+VR2).
If PC<PCM in increased reaction or PC>PCM in decreased reaction, PRO flag is

marked.
11.2.2 Reaction Rate Method

Figure11-21 Antibody Excess Reaction Curve
Figure11-22 Antigen excess reaction curve
The reaction rate method is based on the specified time, in which antibody excess
reaction can reach equilibrium (Figure11-21) but antigen excess reaction cannot
(Figure11-22). Prozone check is performed using the following parameters:
Measuring points: Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4

Prozone limit: PC;
Absorbance low limit for prozone check: ABS
Aq 4 Aq 3
q 4 q3
Sample PC = . If PC>PCM, PRO flag is marked.
Aq 2 Aq1
q 2 q1
Enter measuring points as follows:
For single-reagent 14<=q1<q2<q3<q4<=Reaction end point<=80.

test,
For 43<=q1<q2<q3<q4<= Reaction end point<= 80.
double-reagent
test,
For triple-reagent 92<=q1<q2<q3<q4<= Reaction end point<= 170;
test,
For 133<=q1<q2<q3<q4<= Reaction end point<= 170.
quadruple-reagent
test,
Prozone check will not be performed if:
(1) End point absorbance A is less than absorbance low limit in increased
reaction or greater than that in decreased reaction;
(2) Absolute value of response R is greater than RCMAX (absolute value of
response of most-concentrated calibrator).

11.3 Serum Index
11.3.1 What is Serum Index
Figure11-23 Absorption Spectrum of Serum Reactant
Figure11-23 shows three absorption spectrums of serum samples.
Curve 1 is of the ideal serum without any disturbance.

Curve 2 is of the serum with chromophores like icterus, hemolysis and
lipemia.
Curve 3 is of the serum that contains small bubbles or suspending particles.
Small bubbles and suspending particles, which are not sensitive to wavelength and
may only cause the absorption spectrum to translate increasingly (Curve 3), can be
removed using double wavelength method. However, the disturbance such as
icterus, hemolysis and lipemia, which are very sensitive to wavelength and cause the
absorption spectrum to be complex (Figure11-24), cannot be eliminated with double
wavelength method, thus leading to false results.

Figure11-24 Absorption Spectrum of Icterus, Hemolysis and Lipemia
Serum index is the level of hemolysis, icterus and lipemia in serum samples, and can
be employed to judge whether the sample can be used or a sample blank is needed.
11.3.2 Calculation of Serum Index

Calculation of serum index for single-reagent test is shown below.
Sample: Serum;
th th
Reagent: Physiological saline. The average of absorbance at 4 -8 measuring
points after sample dispensing should be used to calculate serum index.
You should enter the serum factors (A, B, C, D, E, F) and thresholds for lipemia,
hemolysis and icterus.
Figure11-25 Settings of Serum Factors and Thresholds

The serum index is calculated as follows:
Six wavelengths (n=450, 505, 570, 605, 670, 700) are selected to determine the
serum index.
Calculation of turbidity index (lipemia): Primary wavelength: 600, secondary

wavelength: 700
AL = A600 A700 , turbidity index: L = 1 / C AL ;
Calculation of hemolysis index: Primary wavelength: 570, secondary wavelength:

605
AH = A570 A605 , hemolysis index: H = 1 / A ( AH B AL ) ;
Calculation of icterus index: Primary wavelength: 450, secondary wavelength:

505
AI = A450 A505 , icterus index: I = 1 / D ( AI E AH F AL ) .

P/N: 046-001970-00(2.0)

BS 400

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

BS 400

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

BS-400/BS-420

For this Service Manual, the issued Date is 2012-06.

Intellectual Property Statement

Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential

Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rent, adaption and translation of

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall

all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of

the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.

Upon request, Mindray may provide, with compensation, necessary circuit

It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this

This warranty shall not extend to:

any Mindray product which has been subjected to misuse, negligence or

any product of any other manufacturer.

Obtain return authorization: Contact the Mindray Service Department and

Who Should Read This Manual

What Can You Find in This Manual

Conventions Used in This Manual

In this manual, the signal words BIOHAZARD, WARNING, CAUTION and

When you see Then

Read the statement following the symbol. The

Read the statement following the symbol. The

Read the statement following the symbol. The

CE marking. The device is fully in conformity with the

In Vitro diagnostic equipment

Biohazard warning: risk of potentially biohazardous infection

Warning: Risk of personal injury or equipment damage

Warning: risk of burn

Caution: laser radiation

Protective ground terminal

OFF (Main Power)

COM Serial Port

Preventing Electric Shock

Preventing Personal Injury Caused by Moving Parts

Preventing Personal Injury Caused by Photometer Lamp

Handling Reagents and Wash Solution

Treating Waste Liquids

Preventing Fire or Explosion

Operating the System

Setting up the System

Computer and Printer

1 System Description .................................................................... 1-1

2 System Performance and Workflow.......................................... 2-1

3 Installation Procedures .............................................................. 3-1

4 Units and Modules ...................................................................... 4-1

5 Hydropneumatic System............................................................ 5-1

6 Hardware ..................................................................................... 6-1

7 Replacement of Other Components and Parts ........................ 7-1

8 Service and Maintenance ........................................................... 8-1

9 Test and Maintenance Software ................................................ 9-1

10 Troubleshooting ....................................................................... 10-1

11 Calculation Methods................................................................. 11-1

Figure 1-1 Analyzing Unit and Operation Unit

1 System Description 1-1

Figure 1-2 Layout of the system panel

1-2 1 System Description

1. All mechanical units are initialized.

3. The reagent disk rotates to R1 aspirate position, and R1 probe aspirates

5. R1 is incubated in reaction cuvette for several periods.

7. The reaction cuvette with R1 dispensed rotates to the sample dispense

9. In case of double-reagent tests, when sample is dispensed, the reagent disk

1 System Description 1-3

13. Triple-/quadruple-reagent analysis is similar to single-/double-reagent analysis